Empowered by Innovation Introduction Features IntraMail Features System 1001-1702 Station 2101-2501 Line 3101-3715 Voice Mail 4101-4231 P/N 1093100 Rev 3, June 2006 Printed in U.S.A. 01.00.00 For additional resources, visit our Technical Support site on the web at http://www.necdsx.com.
This manual has been developed by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to: NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway Shelton, CT 06484 www.necunifiedsolutions.
Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the DSX Software Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Feature Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Call Coverage Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Call Coverage Guard Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 User Programmable Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents How Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting Interact with DID Calls. . . . . . . . . . . DID Call Handling with Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DID Station Intercept and Line Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DID Overflow, Camp-On, and Intercept Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 103 105 107 Direct Inward Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents User Programmable Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Headset Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Headset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Off-Hook Signaling and Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Basic Night Service Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Off-Hook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Off-Hook Signaling for Outside Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Hook Signaling for Intercom Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Name Programming Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Message Waiting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Call Forwarding to Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring to Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents IntraMail Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Up Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents External Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fax Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Answering Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Message Storage Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Company Greetings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents System Options: 1001-1702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 10xx-Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 100x-System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 1001-Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 1212-01: Line Port Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 1213-01: Number of PCM Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 1213-02: Clock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 1403-05: FSK Message Waiting Lamp for Single Line Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 1403-06: Loop Disconnect for Single Line Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 1404-Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 1404-01: Caller ID Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 1404-02: Second Call Caller ID .
Table of Contents 1512-Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 1512-01: Automatic Handsfree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 1512-02: Call Waiting Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 1513-Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 1603-03: Exclusive Hold Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 1603-04: Park Orbit Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 1604-Station Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 1604-01: Delay Ring Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 1631-05: Receive Dial Pulse Maximum Make Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 1631-06: Receive Minimum Flash Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 1631-07: Receive Maximum Flash Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 1631-08: Receive Minimum Clear Signal Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 1632-Outgoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 1654-04: GB Tone Complete Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712 1654-05: GC Response Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 1654-06: GC Tone Complete Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 17xx-Speed Dial (System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 170x-Setup . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Stations: 2101-2501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 21xx-Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 210x-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 2101-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 2113-04: Privacy Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 2113-05: Page Group (Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 2114-Off Hook Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741 2114-01: Prime Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 2143-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 2143-03: Auto Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 2143-04: Message Waiting Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 2143-05: Recording Conversation Beep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) .
Table of Contents 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 2311-01: UCD Group Routing Mailbox Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 2312-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794 2312-01: Number of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 2312-02: Message Retention .
Table of Contents Lines: 3101-3715 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 31xx-Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 310x-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 3101-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 314x-TIE Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 3141-Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .830 3141-01: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Dial 9 Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 3141-02: Tie Line Caller’s Operator Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 3142-Line Access . .
Table of Contents 3531-02: Table Type (Allow or Deny) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 3532-Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .847 3532-xx: Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) . 848 3541-Table Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 41xx-Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 4101-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 2 (Range of Days) Schedule Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 3 (Date) Schedule Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 887 888 889 422x-Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents Maintenance Options: 9001 - 9042 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 90xx-Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 9001-System (System Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents xxviii ◆ Table of Contents DSX Software Manual
Introduction Introduction Using the DSX Software Manual Using the DSX Software Manual How the Manual is Organized This manual describes the features and programming of the DSX telephone system. It is divided into eight chapters as follows: ❥ Introduction This is the chapter you are reading now. It provides information about the DSX system’s default feature setup and basic startup programming.
Default Feature Setup Default Feature Setup Default Features Default Features for Lines 1. All lines are loop start DTMF. • Use 3101-01: Line Type (page 809) to change this assignment. 2. In DSX-80/160, lines 1-12 ring on line keys 1-12 for extensions 300-315. • All other extensions are lamp only for lines 1-12. • Lines 13-64 do not appear on line keys. 3. In DSX40, lines 1-8 ring on line keys 1-8. • Lines 5-8 require the Line Expansion Board. 4.
Default Feature Setup Initial Startup Programming Introduction 1. Enter the programming mode. 1. From any display telephone: - Press INTERCOM + Dial #*#* - Enter the system password + HOLD 2. The system passwords are: - 632379 (NECDSX) for Installer (level 3) - 9999 for System Administrator 2 (level 2) - 0000 for System Administrator 1 (level 1) 3. See System Programming Password Protection (page 336) for more. 2. Assign the correct circuit type to each of your installed lines. 1.
Default Feature Setup Checking your System’s Software Level How to Check your System’s Software Level To check your system’s software level: 4 1. Press INTERCOM. 2. Dial #*#*. • The system software level shows on the first line of your display. • You see: DSX-nn vxx.xx.xx 3. Press SPEAKER to exit.
Charts Charts For this feature Dial this code Barge In (Intrusion) 4 Barging-In on a co-worker’s call Call Forwarding INTERCOM + *30 Canceling Call Forwarding at an extension INTERCOM + *32 + Extension or 0 (for the operator) INTERCOM + *33 INTERCOM + *34 + Extension or 0 Introduction DSX Dial Codes by Feature (Page 1 of 2) When you are Enabling Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer Setting up Call Forwarding Off Premise Enabling Call Forwarding All Calls (for the operator) INTERCOM + *36 + Extension
Charts DSX Dial Codes by Feature (Page 2 of 2) For this feature Monitor / Silent Monitor Night Service / Night Ring Paging Park Dial this code When you are 6 Setting up Monitor after calling a busy co-worker ** + UNA code (01-04) INTERCOM + *1 + Page zone (1-7 or 0 for All Call) INTERCOM + * + System Park Orbit (60-69) INTERCOM + ** + Extension (e.g.
Charts System Number Plan/Capacities (Page 1 of 2) Introduction DSX40 DSX80/160 System Options Classes of Service Conference 1-15 (COS 1 normally reserved for attendants) 32 simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 8 simultaneous Conferences maximum 8 parties maximum in any one Conference Extension Hunting (UCD) Master Numbers 8 Extension Hunting Groups 8 (1-8) Group Call Pickup Groups 8 (1-8, 0 = unassigned) Privacy Release Groups Speed Dial, Personal 16 (1-16,
Charts System Number Plan/Capacities (Page 2 of 2) Analog Door Boxes, Built-In DSX40 DSX80/160 2 0 Analog Door Boxes, Total The maximum number of DSX Analog Door Boxes you can install is determined by the number of 2PGDAD Modules, which in turn is limited only by the availability of 16ESIU station ports. DSS Consoles 4 The System Load Factor may limit the total number that you can install. Refer to the system’s Hardware Manual.
Telephone Illustrations Telephone Illustrations Introduction Ring/Message Lamp 1093100 - 2 Thu June 8 11:52 AM Pat Smith x301 Menu Dir VM:00 CL:00 Alpanumeric Display CHECK CLEAR Speed Dial Bin keys Soft keys Feature keys Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Line 9 Line 10 Line 11 Line 12 In DSX-40: Keys 1-8 are line keys. Keys 9-12 are undefined. In DSX-80/160: Keys 1-12 are line keys.
Telephone Illustrations Ring/Message Lamp 1093100 - 1 Thu June 8 11:52 AM Pat Smith x301 Menu Dir VM:00 CL:00 Alpanumeric Display CHECK CLEAR Speed Dial Bin keys Soft keys Feature keys Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Line 9 Line 10 Line 11 Line 12 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ TRANSFER INTERCOM FLASH V-MAIL REDIAL DND MUTE CONF SPEAKER HOLD In DSX-40: Keys 1-8 are line keys. Keys 9-24 are undefined. In DSX-80/160: Keys 1-12 are line keys.
Telephone Illustrations Introduction Ring/Message Lamp CHECK 1093100 - 4 Thu June 8 Pat Smith 11:52 AM x301 Menu Directory V-Mail 00 Calls 00 Page Soft keys CLEAR Alpanumeric Display Soft keys SP Dial 1 SP Dial 2 Feature keys Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Line 9 Line 10 Line 11 Line 12 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ TRANSFER INTERCOM FLASH V-MAIL REDIAL DND MUTE CONF SPEAKER HOLD In DSX-40: Keys 1-8 are line keys. Keys 9-24 are undefined.
Telephone Illustrations 1093100 -3 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 ALL CALL Park 60 Park 61 Park 62 Park 63 Park 64 Park 65 Park 66 Night ANSWER RELEASE TRANSFER 60-Button DSS Console 12 ◆ Introduction DSX Software Manual
Introduction Introduction How To Use This Chapter This chapter provides detailed information on the system’s features. The features in this chapter are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary, and are subdivided into headings as follows: ❥ Description Read Description to get an overview of the feature. Along with the feature’s description is the Default Setting, which outlines how the feature works with the default (factory installed) programming.
Account Codes Account Codes Description Use Account codes to categorize and/or restrict outside calls. Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help categorize and/or restrict outside calls. Account Codes are from 2-10 digits long, using any combination of the digits 0-9.
Account Codes An extension user can preselect a line for a Last Number Redial or Save call. Account Codes and Emergency Calls Account Codes are never enforced for emergency (911 and 1+911) calls. DSS Console Account Code Key Programming General Account Code Programming 1. Should users be able to store Account Codes in Speed Dial bins? 1. If yes, in 1551-02: Allow Account Codes in Speed Dial Bins (page 667), enter Yes. 2. If no, in 1551-02: Allow Account Codes in Speed Dial Bins (page 667), enter No. 2.
Account Codes Setting Up Forced Account Codes 1. Should an extension have Forced Account Codes (i.e., be required to enter an Account Code while placing an outside call)? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes (enable Forced Account Codes), in 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (page 651) for the extension’s Class of Service level, enter Yes. 3.
Account Codes Programming Examples 1. Forced Account Codes Require an Account Code only for 900 and 1 + 900 Long Distance Calls. 1. In 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (page 651), enter Yes. 2. In 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only (page 651), enter Yes. 3. In 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level (page 668), enter 2 (for example). 6. In 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) (page 846), make a deny table and enter 900. 7.
Account Codes 2. Forced Account Codes Allow 800 and 1 + 800 Long Distance Dialing without an Account Code. 1. In 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (page 651), enter Yes. 2. In 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only (page 651), enter Yes. 3. In 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level (page 668), enter 2 (for example). Make the following entries for Toll Restriction Level 2. 4. In 3511-01: Active Key Pad (page 840), enter Yes. In 3512-04: Allow N11 Dialing (page 842), enter Yes.
Account Codes Other Related Features Operation Optional (Unforced) Account Codes [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] • In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] For keysets, Optional Account Codes apply to both incoming and outgoing calls. For outgoing calls, you can enter the Account Code before or after dialing the outside number. For Single Line sets, Optional Account Codes apply only to outgoing calls.
Account Codes Forced Account Codes [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] • • In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Forced Account Codes may prevent Speed Dial from dialing 911 emergency services. Forced Account Codes do not apply to incoming calls. To enter a Forced Account Code: Access a line for an outgoing call. • You hear three beeps. 1. 2. When you see Enter Account Code, enter Account Code. • An Account Code can be up to 10 digits long, using the digits 0-9.
Alphanumeric Display Alphanumeric Display Description The Alphanumeric Display messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify callers and customize features. The 22- and 34-Button Display Telephones have a three-line, 24-character per line alphanumeric display. The first line displays the date and time (while idle) and feature status messages. The second line is used extensively by IntraMail. The third line displays the Soft Key definitions.
Attendant Call Queuing Attendant Call Queuing Description Attendant Call Queuing helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for unanswered calls. An unlimited number of callers can queue for the attendant. The callers hear ringback while they wait for the attendant to answer — not busy tone. If you have the attendant as the overflow destination for Direct Inward Lines, for example, unanswered DILs will “stack up” at the attendant until they are answered.
Attendant Call Queuing Operation Attendant Call Queuing [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call flashing the Operator Call Key: 1. Press the flashing Operator Call key.
Attendant Position Attendant Position Description The attendant is the system’s call processing focal point. The attendant is the focal point for call processing within the system. The system can have up to four attendants. In addition to the features of a standard keyset, the attendant also has the following unique capabilities (refer to the respective feature for details): ❥ Attendant Call Queuing (page 22) Incoming Intercom calls from co-workers queue for the attendant.
Attendant Position Programming 1. For best performance, install a 34-Button Display or 34-Button Super Display telephone for the attendant. 1. A DSS Console will also help the attendant process calls more quickly. 2. Set up the system attendants (operators). - In 1501-01: Number of Operators (page 652), enter 1. - In 1502-01: Operator Number 1 (page 653), enter the extension number for operator 1. - If you omit this step, by default users can dial 0 for extension 300 bit it won’t be an operator.
Attendant Position Other Related Features Features Barge In (Intrusion) (page 36) Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Barge In on an attendant. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) A Call Coverage Key will not pick up a call ringing the attendant’s Operator Call Key. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Camp-On to an attendant. Callback (page 61) Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot leave a Callback for an attendant.
Attendant Position Operation Attendant Position [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To call the attendant: Press INTERCOM. • You hear dial tone. 2. Dial 0. • You hear two beeps. • This calls the attendant assigned to your extension. If your system has multiple attendants, you can reach them by dialing 01-04. • In a multiple attendant system, you can dial 0 and wait on the line to automatically call operator 1.
Auto Redial Auto Redial Description Instead of redialing, have Auto Redial periodically retry a busy outside number. Auto Redial periodically redials a busy outside number. If a keyset user places an outside call and the call recipient is busy, the user can press a soft key to enable Auto Redial. The keyset user doesn’t have to retry the number, hoping it will go through. Auto Redial will periodically retry the number up to 15 times.
Auto Redial Programming 1. Is the interval between Auto Redial callout attempts correctly set? 1. If yes, leave 1602-06: Repeat Redial Timer (page 673) at its current setting. 2. If no, change 1602-06: Repeat Redial Timer (page 673) to meet the site requirements. Is the system waiting an adequate time for busy tone when handling an Auto Redial? Features 2. 1. If yes, leave 1602-07: Repeat Redial Busy Timer (page 673) at its current setting. 2.
Automatic Handsfree Automatic Handsfree Description Automatic Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to answer a call or use a feature. Automatic Handsfree allows a keyset user to place or answer a call Handsfree by just pressing a key — without lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER first.
Automatic Handsfree Other Related Features Operation If enabled, Automatic Handsfree operation is automatic when you press the key. DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 31 Features Features Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place an outside call without first lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER. Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER.
Automatic Ring Down Automatic Ring Down Description Turn to Ringdown Extension (page 293).
Automatic Slot Configuration Automatic Slot Configuration Description The system automatically installs PCBs when you power up the system. Automatic Slot Configuration automatically sets up station and line PCBs when you initially power up the system. This simplifies installation because you don’t have to use system programming to activate station and line PCBs after you plug them in. 4. On power up, the system scans the PCBs from left to right and sets up the extension and line numbering as follows.
Background Music Background Music Description Broadcast music through the telephone speaker for a more pleasing work environment. Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in keysets. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays whenever the extension is idle. Incoming calls and Paging announcements temporarily override (turn off) Background Music. Background Music requires a customer-provided external music source connected to one of two audio input minijacks.
Background Music Other Related Features Features Features Do Not Disturb (page 143) DND does not affect the operation of Background Music. Headset Compatibility (page 198) Background Music plays in the headset when the extension is in the headset mode. Music on Hold (page 246) Background Music and Music on Hold share the same music source. Paging (page 259) Background Music can broadcast over the External Paging speakers.
Barge In (Intrusion) Barge In (Intrusion) Description In an emergency, use Barge In to get through to a co-worker right away. Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding extension and the two parties on the initial call. The user can Barge In on an Intercom call or outside call. CAUTION Unauthorized intrusion on calls using this feature may be interpreted as an invasion of privacy.
Barge In (Intrusion) Operation Barge In (Intrusion) [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Barge In on a call: Place one of the following types of call: • Call busy extension. • Press line key for busy line. • Press INTERCOM and dial 101 for busy line (i.e., using Direct Line Access). • Press INTERCOM and dial #901 for busy line (i.e., using Line Dial-up). • Press INTERCOM and dial Line Group access code (e.g., 9). 2.
Battery Backup Battery Backup Description The system provides permanent backup of system memory. In the event of commercial AC power failure, the NAND Flash memory on the CPU PCB permanently maintains the site database. Additionally, an internal battery on the CPU provides short-term backup of the system date and time (Real Time Clock) and certain station parameters (such as the Caller ID log). The battery will hold the Real Time Clock and station parameters for up to 10-14 days.
Brightness Control Brightness Control Description Turn to Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls (page 388).
Call Coverage Keys Call Coverage Keys Description Call Coverage keys allow an extension user to cover a co-worker’s calls from their own telephone. A keyset can have Call Coverage Keys for a co-worker’s extensions, Ring Group master numbers and UCD Group master numbers. The Call Coverage Key lights when the co-worker’s extension is busy, flashes slowly when the co-worker has an incoming call, and flashes fast when the co-worker is in Do Not Disturb.
Call Coverage Keys Programming 1. Setting up Call Coverage keys on a keyset. 1. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758): 2. Features - For an Immediate Ring Call Coverage key, assign key code 06. - For a No Ring (Lamp Only) Call Coverage key, assign key code 07. - For a Delay Ring Call Coverage key, assign key code 08. 2.
Call Coverage Keys Other Related Features Features Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120) DSS Consoles can have Call Coverage keys. Distinctive Ringing (page 135) By using Key Ring Override, Distinctive Ringing allows an extension user to set up unique ringing for their Call Coverage keys. Door Box (page 147) If you enter Door Chime type 0 (normal ring) above, you can set up Call Coverage keys for the Door Box Ring Group.
Call Coverage Keys Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Answering Call Coverage Keys [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call ringing or flashing a Call Coverage key: 1. Press the flashing Call Coverage key. [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Features Using Call Coverage Keys to Place Calls In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call from an idle Call Coverage key to the covered extension: 1.
Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Description Call Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area. Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their call to another extension. The types of Call Forwarding are: ❥ Call Forwarding when Not Answered Calls ringing the extension forward when not answered. ❥ Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered Calls ringing the extension forward when not answered, and all calls forward while the extension is busy.
Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Toggle in a Personal Speed Dial Bin While the extension is idle, pressing the bin key puts the extension in the Call Forwarding programming mode - the same as pressing INTERCOM and dialing *3. ❥ If the extension has Call Forwarding enabled, and the user presses the bin key and waits (for at least 6 seconds), Call Forwarding is automatically cancelled.
Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Timers The following diagrams show how the system implements various timers when handling forwarded calls. Refer to the programming for each individual timer for more information. Transferred Outside Call to Forwarded Extension Extension A transfers line to extension B, which is forwarded Busy/No Answer (type 2) to extension C. 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) The line rings extension B for the Transfer Recall time. See Transfer (page 358) for more.
Call Forwarding DIL (with overflow) to Forwarded Extension DIL (with overflow) rings programmed destination, which is forwarded Busy/No Answer (type 2) to a co-worker. DIL rings programmed DIL destination for the DIL No Answer time. 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) If unanswered, the call rings the extension to which it is forwarded for the DIL No Answer time. 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) If unanswered, the DIL rings the programmed overflow destination for the DIL No Answer time.
Call Forwarding Programming 1. Should an extension be able to use Call Forwarding? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter Yes. 3. If no, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter No. 2. If an extension has Ring No Answer forwarding enabled, do calls route to the forwarding destination after the correct interval? 1.
Call Forwarding IntraMail Features None DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 49 Features Group Ring (page 189) Call Forwarding will not reroute Group Ring calls. Intercom (page 211) Call Forwarding when Busy and Call Forwarding when Busy/Not Answered will not reroute voiceannounced Intercom calls. It will reroute only ringing Intercom calls. Key Ring (page 214) Call Forwarding will not reroute Key Ring calls. Line Keys (page 227) Call Forwarding will not reroute calls ringing line keys.
Call Forwarding Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Activating or Canceling Call Forwarding To activate Call Forwarding: Select the Call Forwarding options. 1. [Menu + Call Forward] [Menu + Cfwd] Alternately do one of the following: • Press INTERCOM and dial *3. • Press your Call Forwarding Feature Key. Select or cancel a Call Forwarding type. 2. [Immediate] [Immed] Select Call Forwarding Immediate. • Alternately dial 4.
Call Forwarding Off Premises Call Forwarding Off Premises Description When a user is out of the office, they can send their calls to their home office or cell phone. Off Premises Call Forwarding reroutes: ❥ Intercom calls ❥ Transferred calls ❥ Direct Inward Lines ❥ UTRF (unscreened transfer) calls routed from the voice mail Automated Attendant ❥ Circular and Terminal Extension Hunting calls Off Premises Call Forwarding does not reroute: ❥ Key Ring calls ❥ Calls to a UCD Group master number.
Call Forwarding Off Premises • An extension Speed Dial number stored in bin 719 should not be longer than 16 digits. If it is, the system automatically clears bin 719 when it stores an Off Premises Call Forwarding number in bin 720. • An extension user cannot off premise call forward to a Personal Speed Dial bin that contains an Intercom number. If the user selects a bin that contains an Intercom number, the system cancels Off Premises Call Forwarding.
Call Forwarding Off Premises Other Related Features Features Call Forwarding (page 44) Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their call to another extension. Single Line Telephones (page 305) Call Forwarding Off Premises is not available at single line telephones. IntraMail Features None Features Operation Activating or Canceling Call Forwarding Off Premises In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To activate Call Forwarding: 1.
Call Forwarding Off Premises Activating or Canceling Call Forwarding Off Premises c. To view the currently enabled Off Premises Call Forwarding number (if any): [VIEW] [View] Select to view the currently stored number. • Press SPEAKER to exit the view mode. Select the Call Forwarding mode. 4. 54 In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] ◆ [All] [All] Select forwarding all calls. • Alternately dial 2. [Line Only] [Line] Select forwarding outside calls only.
Call Timer Call Timer Description Call Timer helps users that must keep track of their time on the phone. The Call Timer feature also provides: ❥ Review of Previously Timed Call Any time after hanging up from a timed call, a display keyset user can press their Manual or Automatic Call Timer key to review the duration of that call. ❥ Timer Reset for Current Call While the display keyset user is timing their call, they can press CLEAR at any time to reset the Call Timer to 00:00:00.
Call Timer Other Related Features Features Caller ID (page 63) The Auto Timer feature interacts with Caller ID on the first line of the telephone display. Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) Call Timer shows the time a user has been on an outside call. Flash (page 177) Flash restarts the Call Timer. Hold (page 202) A user’s Call Timer starts when they pick up a call from Hold. If they place the call on Hold and another user picks it up, the timer restarts for the new user.
Call Timer Stopping and Restarting the Call Timer for Your Call In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To stop the Call Timer: 1. 2. Do one of the following. a. [Timer] [Time] b. Press the Manual or Automatic Call Timer key. Press the Call Timer soft key. The Call Timer disappears from the display. Features To restart the Call Timer: • The timer will restart from 00:00. 1. Do one of the following. a. [Timer] [Time] b. Press the Manual or Automatic Call Timer key.
Call Waiting / Camp-On Call Waiting / Camp-On Description Call Waiting helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten. With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without hanging up. When the user Camps-On (by dialing 2), the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating the first waiting call.
Call Waiting / Camp-On Programming 1. Should an extension be able to send Camp-On tones to a busy co-worker? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the sending extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1402-03: Camp-On to Busy Extension (page 633), enter Yes for the initiating extension. 2. Features - Check step 2 below to be sure Camp-On is not blocked by the receiving extension. - This option does not restrict Callback. 3.
Call Waiting / Camp-On Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) An extension user cannot Camp-On to the attendant because the attendant’s extension is never busy. Callback (page 61) If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp-On to a Callback. Caller ID (page 63) An extension programmed to receive Camp-On tones or Off-Hook Ringing from a waiting call will also receive Second Call Caller ID.
Callback Callback Description With Callback, a user does not have to repeatedly call a busy extension back, hoping to find it idle. An extension user can leave a Callback at many extensions simultaneously. The system processes the Callbacks as the extensions become free. In addition, many extensions can leave a Callback at the same extension. The system processes these Callbacks on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis.
Callback Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) An extension user cannot leave a Callback for the attendant because the attendant’s extension is never busy. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) If an extension user starts to leave a Callback request but doesn’t hang up, the system Camps-On instead. Central Office Calls, Answering (page 74) If a line is ringing an extension because of a prior Callback, and then receives a new outside call, it will start ringing for the new call.
Caller ID Caller ID Description Caller ID automatically displays the phone number and optional name for incoming outside calls. Caller ID allows a display keyset to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called Directory Number or DN) and optional name as the call is ringing. Caller ID supports the telco’s Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND) service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e.
Caller ID Third Party Caller ID Check Third Party Caller ID Check allows an idle or busy keyset user to display the Caller ID data for another line. The line that the user checks can be ringing or busy. Caller ID Display Separator An extension’s display can optionally show a calling party number separator. The separator is a dash after the area code and after the local exchange on a 7 or 10 digit number. If disabled, the calling party number displays without a separator.
Caller ID Programming 1. Should the outside line provide Caller ID (if Caller ID service is also provided by the telco)? 1. If yes: 2. Should an extension display the incoming Caller ID data? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes: - In 1404-01: Caller ID Display (page 638) enter Yes. - Make sure the extension rings for the line. See Central Office Calls, Answering (page 74) for more. 3.
Caller ID Other Related Features Features Call Timer (page 55) The Auto Timer feature interacts with Caller ID on the first line of the telephone display. If an extension has Call Timer enabled, the first line (i.e., caller’s name) of the Second Call Caller ID display won’t show. The user will only see the caller’s number (in the second line).
Caller ID Operation Clearing the Display In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To cancel (clear) the Caller ID display and return your phone to its normal display: • You can only do this while you are on a call, not while your phone is ringing. 1. Press CLEAR. Features To turn the Caller ID display back on (after you press CLEAR to cancel it): 1. Press CHECK.
Caller ID Logging Caller ID Logging Description An extension can store the caller’s name and phone number for easy review and redialing. When caller ID is enabled, Caller ID Logging stores a record of the caller’s number and name (if provided by the telco) for each outside call that rings an extension. This allows an extension user to easily review and redial their calls. The system can log records directly to an extension or to one of 8 Caller ID Logging Groups.
Caller ID Logging Types of Calls that are Logged Call ID Logging will make a record of any outside call to an extension that can normally be answered using Ringing Line Preference. These include: ❥ Line key (Key Ring) and Loop Key calls ❥ Transfers ❥ Direct Inward Lines (DILs) ❥ Group Ring calls Caller ID and Answering Machines DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 69 Features If voice mail is not installed, Caller ID Logging can provide unique handling of a customer-provided answering machine.
Caller ID Logging Programming Setting Up Caller ID Callbacks 1. Make sure Caller ID is installed. 1. If Caller ID is not installed, turn to Caller ID (page 63) and set up your system’s Caller ID. 2. Assign the outgoing route the system will use for Caller ID callbacks. 1. In 3711-01: Caller ID Callback Route Type (page 856), select the type of route used for Caller ID callbacks (1 = line, 2 = Line Group). 2.
Caller ID Logging - In 3712-03: Home Area Code Exception List Type (page 859), specify the Home Area Code Exception List Table as a Toll Table (1) or a Local Table (0). - If it is a Toll Table, the codes you enter in the table are toll calls. All other codes are local calls. - If it is a Local Table, the codes you enter in the table are local calls. All other codes are toll calls.
Caller ID Logging Programming Examples 1. Enable Caller ID callbacks (return calls) for a system in area code 203. • There is no 10-digit local calling or other special requirement. 1. In 3121-01: Caller ID Type (page 825) for each line enter the type of Caller ID required: - (DSP = 1, ATRU-DB = 2, T1/E1 ANI = 3). 2. Set up the outbound route for Caller ID callbacks. - In 3711-01: Caller ID Callback Route Type (page 856), select the type of route used for Caller ID callbacks (1 = line, 2 = Line Group).
Caller ID Logging Operation Reviewing the Caller ID Log In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To review your Caller ID log: 1. Select to review all your Caller ID records. • You see the following review options. • Press Volume Up and Volume Down to scroll through your records. [View All] [All] Review Options • On a 3-line display telephone, press CHECK to switch between the name (page 1) and number (page 2) display. [Callback] [Call] Select to call the person back.
Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Answering Description The system allows outside calls to ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO calls to meet the exact site requirements. Answering Priority When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the following order: 1. Ringing Intercom call 2.
Central Office Calls, Answering Programming Basic Programming 1. Make sure each line’s circuit type and loop length setting match the requirements of the connected service. 1. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), set the circuit type to match the connected service. 3. In 3103-03: Loop Length (page 815) for analog lines only, set this option to compensate for the telco cir- cuits loop length. - For normal installations, enter 0. - If the system is very close to the central office or behind a PBX, enter 1.
Central Office Calls, Answering Setting Up Line and Loop Keys 1. Set up line and loop keys for an extension. 1. For line keys: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 03. - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the line number (1-64). - If an extension doesn’t have any line keys, you should assign Fixed or Switched Loop keys to make handling outside calls easier. 2. For Fixed Loop keys: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 01. 3.
Central Office Calls, Answering Other Related Features Features Features Call Timer (page 55) The Call Timer helps a user keep track of the time they spend on the phone. Direct Inward Line (page 109) A DIL rings an extension directly. Line Keys (page 227) Line keys simplify answering outside calls. Loop Keys (page 233) In order to answer outside calls, extensions without line keys should have loop keys. Night Service / Night Ring (page 252) Night Service determines how outside calls ring at night.
Central Office Calls, Placing Central Office Calls, Placing Description Customize the call placing options to meet the site requirements and each individual’s needs. The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing calls. A user can place a call by: ❥ Pressing a Line Key Any keyset can have line keys for one-touch access to specific lines. - See Line Keys on page 227 for more. ❥ Pressing a Loop Key Loop Keys provide a user with one-touch access to the assigned Loop Group.
Central Office Calls, Placing DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 79 Features Default Setting • Lines 1-12 ring on line keys 1-12 for extensions 300-315. All other extensions are lamp only for lines 1-12. Lines 13-64 do not appear on line keys. • All extensions have full access on all lines. • Line Group Routing (dial 9) is assigned to Line Group 90 (which contains lines 1-8). Dial 9 works by default.
Central Office Calls, Placing Programming Basic Programming 1. Make sure each line’s circuit type and loop length setting match the requirements of the connected service. 1. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), set the circuit type to match the connected service. 2. In 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (page 811), indicate whether the line is DTMF (1) or Dial Pulse (0). 3. In 3103-03: Loop Length (page 815) for analog lines only, set this option to compensate for the telco cir- cuits loop length.
Central Office Calls, Placing Access Code Options 1. Should extension have single digit (dial 9) or 2-digit (90-98) access to outside Line Groups? 1. For single digit access: 2. Should extension have Line Dial-Up capability? 1. If yes, in 2111-06: Line Dial Up (page 732) enter Yes. 2. If no, in 2111-06: Line Dial Up (page 732) enter No. 3. Should 1 be the first digit in the Direct Line Access code? 1.
Central Office Calls, Placing Setting Up Transmit and Receive Gain 1. While on an outside call, is a user’s conversation transmitted to the caller at a comfortable level? 1. If yes, leave 3103-01: Transmit Gain (page 814) for the line at it’s current value. 2. If no, in 3103-01: Transmit Gain (page 814) adjust the line’s transmit gain as required. 2. While on an outside call, is the conversation received by the user at a comfortable level? 1.
Central Office Calls, Placing Other Related Features DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 83 Features Features Account Codes (page 14) You can use Store and Forward with Forced Account Codes. Automatic Handsfree (page 30) With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place an outside call without first lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER. Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER.
Central Office Calls, Placing Operation Placing Outside Calls Using Line Keys In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place an outside call over a specific line using a line key: 1. Lift handset. 2. Press line key. • You hear dial tone on the line you select and the line key lights green. • To use loop keys for placing calls, see Loop Keys (page 233). 3. Dial outside number.
Central Office Calls, Placing Using Store and Forward Feature Name In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place an outside call using Store and Forward: 1. Do one of the following. Press INTERCOM and dial 9. • You may optionally be able to dial 90-98. b. Press a Switched Loop key + Dial Line Group number (90-98). c. Press Fixed Loop key. 2. Dial the outside telephone number. 3.
Check Key Check Key Description Quickly check keyset and DSS Console Feature Key assignments. A keyset user can use the CHECK key to check keyset and DSS Console Feature Key assignments and Personal Speed Dial bin names. Conditions • None Default Setting • Enabled Programming None Other Related Features Features Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120) Check DSS Console Feature Key assignments. Feature Keys (page 169) Check Feature Key assignments.
Check Key Checking Personal Speed Dial Bin Name and Number (22-Button and 34-Button 3-Line Keysets Only) a. Press the Personal Speed Dial bin key once to display the name for the lower numbered bin. • For example, pressing bin 1 in this step displays the name for 701. b. Press the Personal Speed Dial bin key a second time to display the number stored in the lower numbered bin. • For example, pressing bin 1 in this step displays the number stored for 701. c.
Class of Service Class of Service Description Customize features and options for extensions and outside lines. Class of Service (COS) sets various features and options for extensions and outside lines. The system allows any number of extensions and lines to share the same Class of Service.
Conference Conference Description A user can set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation.
Conference Operation Setting up a Conference In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up a Conference: 1. Establish an Intercom or outside call. 2. Press CONF. • Your hear Intercom dial tone. • Your caller hears Music on Hold (if installed) while they wait for you to set up the Conference. 3. Do one of the following: a. Dial extension you want to add. b. Place or answer an outside call. c. Retrieve a call from Park Orbit. 4. Press CONF to set up the Conference.
Conference, Meet-Me Conference, Meet-Me Description Turn to Meet-Me Conference (page 236).
Conference, Unsupervised Conference, Unsupervised Description Turn to Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference (page 341).
Contrast Controls Contrast Controls Description Turn to Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls (page 388).
Cordless Telephone Cordless Telephone Description Provides cordless mobility and a rich feature set for employees away from their desks. The DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone (P/N 730087) is a 900 Mhz digital narrow band FM cordless telephone that provides mobility, flexibility and convenience for those who spend much of the workday away from their desk.
Delayed Ringing Delayed Ringing Description Delayed Ringing helps co-workers cover each other’s unanswered calls. Programming 1. Should a line have delayed ringing at an extension? 1. If yes: - In 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (page 764), enter 4. - In 1604-01: Delay Ring Timer (page 678), set the delay ring interval to meet the site requirements. 2.
Dial Number Preview Dial Number Preview Description Dial Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors. Dial Number Preview lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials it out. Conditions • None. Default Setting • Enabled Programming None Other Related Features Features Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) Dial Number Preview allows an extension user to review a number before the system dials it out.
Dial Number Preview Editing the Displayed Number 4. In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Press a line key to have the system automatically dial the displayed number. Dial Number Preview Editing Example In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To replace 2049265410 with 2039265400: Dial * followed by 2049265410. You see: 2049265410- 2. Press Volume Up until you see: 20-9265410 3. Dial 3. You see: 203-265410 4.
Dial Tone Detection Dial Tone Detection Description You can set up the system to detect CO dial tone. The system can optionally detect precise CO dial tone for automatically dialed outside calls (such as Speed Dial and Auto Redial calls). With Dial Tone Detection enabled for a line, the system will monitor the line when initially seized for valid dial tone or stutter dial tone. If valid EIA/TIA dial tone is detected, the system outdials the call on the line.
Direct Inward Dialing Direct Inward Dialing Description Directly dial system extensions from outside the system. For outgoing calls, DID lines operate identically to loop start lines. In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides: ❥ DID Dialed Number Translation The system provides a 100-entry DID Translation Table. This table gives you more flexibility when buying DID service from the telco. If you can't buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g.
Direct Inward Dialing ❥ ❥ - If the telco doesn’t send any digits into the system, or If the digits sent by the telco don’t correspond to a DID Translation Table entry, or If the destination extension is out of service: The call follows the 3112-Termination routing for the line. This includes the settings for Day Termination, Day Overflow, Night Termination, and Night Overflow. The call is handled the same as an analog line and follows the normal system timers.
Direct Inward Dialing DID Call Handling The following steps illustrate how the system handles DID calls when the call is not intercepted by an extension’s Call Forwarding or Extension Hunting. Basic DID Call Handling 1. Is telco sending incorrect digits, or is there a DID Translation Table programming error? Features 1. If yes: Vacant Intercept The call normally follows the following Line Overflow programming.
Direct Inward Dialing How Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting Interact with DID Calls The following chart summarizes how the system handles unanswered DID calls when Call Forwarding and/ or Extension Hunting are enabled at an extension. For the specific routing details, see: ❥ DID Call Handling with Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting (page 103). ❥ DID Station Intercept and Line Overflow (page 105).
Direct Inward Dialing DID Call Handling with Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting The following two tables show the detailed interaction between Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting for unanswered DID Calls. These interactions occur when an extension user enables Call Forwarding and their extension is already part of an Extension Hunting group. Call Forwarding and Type 1 (Ring No Answer Line) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type • • • DID call rings destination.
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forwarding and Type 1 (Ring No Answer Line) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type No Answer *36 Ring No Answer • • • Forwarding Off *30 • • • • 104 DID call rings destination. If unanswered, it rings the forwarding destination. If still unanswered, call routes to Line Overflow. Busy • • In DND DID call rings the hunt destination. If unanswered, call routes to Line Overflow. DID call rings destination.
Direct Inward Dialing DID Station Intercept and Line Overflow The following table shows the detailed interaction between DID Station Intercept and Line Overflow for unanswered DID Calls. These interactions occur when an extension has DID Station Intercept enabled, the DID line has Line Overflow enabled, and the call is not intercepted by either Call Forwarding or Extension Hunting.
Direct Inward Dialing Programming Basic Programming 1. Set the circuit type for each DID line. 1. Be sure your T1 PCB is installed and connected and that your telco is providing T1 DID service. 2. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), enter the correct circuit type for each DID line: - 03 for DID Wink Start - 04 for DID Immediate Start 3. In 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (page 811), indicate whether the line is DTMF (1) or Dial Pulse (0). 4.
Direct Inward Dialing - In 3121-04: Number of ANI Digits (page 826), specify the number of digits the telco provides in the ANI number (for option 1 above only). This program does not apply to options 2-4 above. 2. If no, in 3121-01: Caller ID Type (page 825) do not enter 3 to enable ANI-based Caller ID for the line. DID Overflow, Camp-On, and Intercept Options 1. Should the system provide Line Overflow for the DID line during the day? 1. If yes: 2.
Direct Inward Dialing 4. Does an unanswered extension ring the correct amount of time before DID Station Intercept or Line Overflow occurs? 1. If yes, leave 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) at its current value. 2. If no, adjust 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) as required. 5. Should DID calls be allowed to Camp-On to an extension? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1401-09: Receive DID Camp-On (page 631) enter Yes. 3.
Direct Inward Line Direct Inward Line Description A DIL lets an employee know which calls are just for them. A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a line that rings an extension directly. Since DILs only ring one extension, employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL’s phone number, the call rings the operator on the International Sales line key.
Direct Inward Line Programming Basic Programming 1. Check the DIL’s circuit type. 1. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), check to be sure the line’s circuit type matches the connected service. 2. In 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (page 811), indicate whether the line is DTMF (1) or Dial Pulse (0). 2. Assign the DIL day and night mode terminations (answering points). 1. In the day: - In 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819), assign the DIL day mode termination.
Direct Inward Line DIL Overflow 1. Should an unanswered DIL overflow during the day? 1. If yes: 2. Should an unanswered DIL overflow at night? 1. If yes: - In 3112-05: Enable Night Overflow (page 820) enter Yes. - In 3112-06: Night Overflow Destination (page 821) enter the night overflow destination. The destination can be: - An extension - A UCD Group master number - The voice mail master number - A Ring Group master number - Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR) 2.
Direct Inward Line Setting Up Line and Loop Keys 1. Set up line or loop key for the DIL. 1. For line keys: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 03. - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the DIL line number (1-64). - If an extension doesn’t have any line keys, you should assign Fixed or Switched Loop keys to make handling outside calls easier. 2. For Fixed Loop keys: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 01. 3.
Direct Inward Line Other Related Features DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 113 Features Features Call Forwarding (page 44) Call Forwarding will reroute an extension’s DILs. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) A DIL to a busy extension will send Camp-On tones (if the extension is programmed to normally receive Camp-On tones).
Direct Inward Line Operation Handling Your Direct Inward Lines In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line: 1. The line or loop key for your DIL flashes green. 2. Lift handset. • The key lights on green when you connect to your caller. To place your Direct Inward Line into the Night Mode: 1. 114 Press DND. • Your DND flashes. • This also enables Do Not Disturb for your extension.
Direct Line Access Direct Line Access Description Priority users can access lines directly. Direct Line Access also lets maintenance personnel access and test individual lines. Programming 1. Should extension have Direct Line Access capability? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes; - In 1402-06: Direct Line Access (page 634), enter Yes. - It is not necessary to allow access in 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763).
Direct Line Access Operation Using Direct Line Access In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call over a specific line using Direct Line Access: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Press INTERCOM. 3. Dial 1 plus the line number (e.g., 01 for line 1). • If you hear busy tone, you may be able to dial 2 to queue for the line. See Line Queuing / Line Callback (page 230) for more. 4. Dial the outside number.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Direct Station Selection (DSS) Description Quickly place and Transfer calls to co-workers, without having to look up or dial your coworker’s extension numbers. Important • If you enable an extension’s DSS Keys and leave the extension’s default Prime Line programming intact, the line keys automatically change to DSS keys when the user lifts the handset. To avoid confusion, be sure to explain this to your users.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Programming 1. Should extension have DSS capability on their Feature Keys? 1. If yes: - In 2111-03: Enable DSS/BLF Keys (page 731), enter Yes. - In 2114-01: Prime Line Key (page 741), do not enable Intercom Prime Line. This prevents the extension’s line keys from switching to DSS mode when the user lifts the handset while idle. 2. If no, in 2111-03: Enable DSS/BLF Keys (page 731) enter No. 2. Should the extension have pre programmed DSS keys? 1.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Placing a Call using a DSS Key To place a call to a co-worker using a DSS key: Lift the handset. 2. Press INTERCOM. • Your DSS keys show the status of the assigned extension: Off = Idle On = Busy or ringing Fast flash = in Do Not Disturb 3. Press DSS key for the co-worker you want to call. Features 1.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Description DSS Consoles provide one-touch access to extensions, lines, and system features. The DSS Console (P/N 1090024 for black and P/N 090029 for white) gives a keyset user one-button access to extensions, lines, and selected features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing such as operators or dispatchers). The system allows you to install 4 DSS Consoles maximum per system.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Default DSS Console Key Assignments The following illustration shows the default DSS Console key assignments.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Programming 1. Set up the DSS Console. 1. In 1202-01: Primary Station Port Assignment (page 612), assign each DSS Console hardware (physical) port to a software port. - 301 for DSS Console 1 - 302 for DSS Console 2 - 303 for DSS Console 3 - 304 for DSS Console 4 - Note that the first DSS Console installed auto-IDs as software port 301. 2. In 2401-01: DSS Owner (page 800), enter the number of the keyset extension using the DSS Console. 2.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console DSS Console Feature Key Assignments DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 1 of 4) Key Type Undefined Key Code and Data Operation 0 N/A Use this option to designate a Feature Key as undefined (no function). 3 + nn (line number 1-64) Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a line key. • Press the key to place or answer call. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line is idle or not installed. On (red) . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 2 of 4) Key Type Call Coverage No Ring (page 40) Description Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key. Key Code and Data 7 + nnn (extension number) Operation • Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Off . . . . . . . . . . . Covered extension is idle. On . . . . . . . . . . . Covered extension is busy. Slow Flash . . . . . .
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 3 of 4) Description Key Code and Data System Speed Dial Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a System Speed Dial key. You assign the key to specific System Speed Dial bin. • There is no BLF for this key type. 14 + nnn (bin 001999) • Press key to dial stored number. Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Personal Speed Dial key. You assign the key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 4 of 4) Key Type Save Number Dialed (page 298) Account Code (page 14) Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Save Number Dialed key. • There is no BLF for this key type. 25 While on a call: • Press key to save the number you just dialed. While idle: • Press key to redial a previously saved number. Use this option to assign a Feature Key as an Account Code key. 26 1.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Other Related Features DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 127 Features Features Account Codes (page 14) A DSS Console can have an Account Code key to simplify Account Code entry. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) A DSS Console can have Call Coverage keys. Call Forwarding (page 44) A DSS Console Call Forwarding key can streamline Call Forwarding operation.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Operation See DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (page 123). Using the Speed Processing Keys on the DSS Console In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To use the ANSWER key: 1. Press ANSWER to answer any call ringing your extension. To use the RELEASE key: 1. Press RELEASE to hang up (disconnect) your active call. To use the TRANSFER key: 1. Press TRANSFER on your DSS Console instead of the TRANSFER key on your extension.
Directed Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Description Directed Call Pickup allows co-workers to answer each other’s calls. Programming 1. Line access is not required for Directed Call Pickup. 1. It is not necessary to allow access in 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763). - Directed Call Pickup allows an extension to pick up a call on a line to which it normally does not have access. Other Related Features Features Hold (page 202) Directed Call Pickup can pick up Hold recalls.
Directed Call Pickup Operation Using Directed Call Pickup In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To intercept a call ringing a co-worker’s extension: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial * *. 3. Dial the number of the extension whose call you want to intercept. • To intercept a call ringing an attendant, dial the attendant’s extension number (e.g., 300). Do not dial 0 or 01-04.
Directory Dialing Directory Dialing Description Allows users to place Intercom or Speed Dial calls from a displayed list of names. Programming 1. Enter names for extensions. 1. In 2101-02: Station Name (page 720), enter an extension’s name. - An extension user may be able to enter their own name. See Names for Extensions and Lines (page 249) for more. 2. Enter names for Speed Dial bins. 1.
Directory Dialing 5. Do extension users have adequate time to enter their Directory Dialing options? 1. If yes, leave 1602-01: Interdigit Timer (page 671) at its current value. 2. If no, adjust 1602-01: Interdigit Timer (page 671) as required. Other Related Features Features Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120) Assign a Directory Dialing key on a DSS Console. Extension Hunting (page 154) Intercom Directory Dialing can call UCD Group names.
Directory Dialing Using Directory Dialing In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] iii. Press Volume Up or Volume Down to scroll through all the names that begin with the letter you selected. OR Skip to the next step if the display name is the one you want to call. iv. [Dial] [Dial] Features ii. Look at your telephone’s display and dial the digit for the letter you want to call. • In the example in step i: - Dial 1 if the name begins with G.
Display, Alphanumeric Display, Alphanumeric Description Turn to Alphanumeric Display (page 21).
Distinctive Ringing Distinctive Ringing Description Allows users to customize their telephone’s ringing so they’ll know when calls are just for them. Important Use 9014-01: Initialize Ring Tones (page 920) to initialize Distinctive Ringing with a single command. Following initialization, you must reset the system or unplug and then re-plug each telephone. The Distinctive Ringing Hierarchy An extension’s Distinctive Ringing uses the following hierarchy: 1. Key Ring Override 2. Extension Ring Override 3.
Distinctive Ringing Understanding Ring Types The Ring Types determine how different types of calls rings extensions. Each Ring Type sounds unique because it uses one of the 10 available ring tones. The first four Ring Types are assigned by default (see the table below). The last two (B and C) are unassigned by default but you can assign on your phone using Extension Override and Key Ring Override.
Distinctive Ringing Conditions • None Default Setting • Outside lines, Ring Groups, and UCD Groups use Type A ringing. • The ASSIGN (ASGN) and KEY soft keys are disabled. • The CONFIG (CNFG) soft keys is enabled. Programming Setting up Distinctive Ring Configuration. 1. Enable the CONFIG (CNFG) soft keys. - In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. - In 1405-01: Ring Type Configuration (page 641), enter Yes. System Programming 2.
Distinctive Ringing 3. Setting Up Extension Ring Override. 1. Enable the RING soft keys. - In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. - In 1405-02: Station Ring Override (page 641), enter Yes. System Programming 2. To set up Extension Ring Override: - In 2103-01: Day Ring Type (page 726), enter the day ring type (1=Type A, 2=Type B, 3=Type C). - In 2103-02: Night Ring Type (page 726), enter the night ring type (1=Type A, 2=Type B, 3=Type C).
Distinctive Ringing 7. Initialize Distinctive Ringing (i.e., return to default). System Programming 1. To initialize Distinctive Ringing system-wide (i.e., return to factory default): - Use 9014-01: Initialize Ring Tones (page 920) from system programming. - This option is not available using an extension’s soft keys.
Distinctive Ringing Operation Distinctive Ring Configuration In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using Distinctive Ring Configuration To customize a Ring Set for your extension: 1. [Menu + Ring [Menu + MORE + Ring] Select the Distinctive Ringing options. 2. [Config] [Cnfg] Select Distinctive Ring Configuration. 3. Do one of the following. a. Select a Ring Type to customize. [Intercom] [Icm] Select to change the Intercom Ring Type.
Distinctive Ringing Extension Override Using Extension Override In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To customize ringing for your extension’s outside calls: [Menu + Ring] [Menu + MORE + Ring] Select the Distinctive Ringing options. 2. [Assign] [Asgn] Select Extension Override. 3. Select the ringing mode you want to change. a. Features 1. [Day Ring] [Day] Select day ring. [Night Ring] [Nght] Select night ring. [Delay Ring] [Dely] Select delay ring.
Distinctive Ringing Key Ring Override Using Key Ring Override In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To assign a Ring Type to a Call Coverage, Group Call Pickup, or line key: 1. [Menu + Ring] [Menu + MORE + Ring] Select the Distinctive Ringing options. 2. [Key] [Key] Select Key Ring Override. a. ◆ [Call Coverage] [Cck] Select your Call Coverage keys. • Your Call Coverage keys light. [Pickup] [Pkup] Select your Group Call Pickup keys.
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Description DND permits an extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements.
Do Not Disturb Call Coverage Key Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The covered extension is: Off Idle or not installed On Busy Slow flash Ringing Medium flash In DND for outside calls (option 1) Fast Flash In DND for Intercom calls (option 2) or All Calls (option 3) Note: When transferring an outside call to an extension in DND, the Transfer will be blocked if the extension has enabled DND for all calls (type 3) or DND for outside calls (type 1).
Do Not Disturb Features Message Waiting (page 238) An extension user can leave a Message Waiting at an extension in Do Not Disturb. Night Service / Night Ring (page 252) A DIL destination activates the night mode for the DIL when they press DND. Paging (page 259) DND blocks Paging announcements. Reverse Voice Over (page 289) DND does not block Reverse Voice Over. Single Line Telephones (page 305) Single line extensions cannot use DND. Transfer (page 358) DND blocks Transfer.
Do Not Disturb Override Do Not Disturb Override Description Easily override a co-worker’s Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb Override lets an extension user override another extension’s Do Not Disturb. This allows a priority employee (such as a supervisor or executive) to get through to a co-worker right away while the coworker’s phone is in Do Not Disturb. DND Override is available to all extensions that have DND Override set in their Class of Service.
Door Box Door Box Description Use a Door Box to remotely monitor an entrance door. ❥ ❥ DSX-80/160 In DSX-80/160, a Door Box connects to an available Door Box port on a 2PGDAD Module (P/N 0891027). Each module supports up to two Door Boxes, with the maximum number of Door Boxes installed limited only by the availability of station ports to connect additional 2PGDAD Modules. DSX-40 In DSX-40, the Door Box can connect to a 2PGDAD module or to one of the two “built-in” Door Box ports.
Door Box Conditions • Door Box P/N 922450 is a weather-tight unit, and can be mounted outside. It has an operating temperature range of -20 to 60 degrees C (-4 to 140 degrees F) and a relative humidity of 10-95%, non-condensing. Default Setting • In DSX 80/160, no Door Boxes are enabled. • In DSX-40, the built-in Door Box ports are enabled for extensions 326 (DOOR 1) and 327 (DOOR 2). Programming Basic Door Box Programming 1.
Door Box 2PGDAD Module Door Box Setup 1. Set up the 2PGDAD Module Door Box ports. 1. Locate an available 16ESIU PCB digital station port (e.g., station port 10/extension 309). 2. Set up the Door Box Ring Groups and chime sounds. 1. Refer to Basic Door Box Programming (page 148) for more. 3. Set up the Door Box relays. 1. The 2PGDAD relays are automatically assigned to their respective Door Box. - 2PGDAD Door Box 1 is assigned to Relay 5. - 2PGDAD Door Box 2 is assigned to Relay 6.
Door Box DSX-40 “Built-In” Door Box Setup 1. Connect an Analog Door Box (P/N 922450) to a “built-in” Door Box port. 1. Refer to the DSX-40 Hardware Manual for additional details. - DOOR 1 is extension 326. - DOOR 2 is extension 327. 2. Optionally have a “built-in” DSX-40 Door Box activate an associated control relay? 1. This programming does not apply to a Door Box connected to a 2PGDAD Module. 2.
Door Box Transfer (page 358) An extension user cannot Transfer a call to a Door Box. IntraMail Features None Operation Calling from the Door Box Features In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call from the Door Box: 1. Press the Door Box call button. 2. When someone inside the building answers your call, speak toward the Door Box. • Once you press the call button, you can not control the call. You must wait for someone to answer.
Equal Access Compatibility Equal Access Compatibility Description See Toll Restriction (page 351) for more.
Extended Ringing Extended Ringing Description Lets calls ring longer that usual to assist co-workers that can’t readily get to their phones. Programming 1. Should the extension have Extended Ringing capability? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1401-02: Extended Ring (page 628) enter Yes. 3. If no, in 1401-02: Extended Ring (page 628) enter No. 2. Does Extended Ringing ring for an adequate time before the call reroutes? 1.
Extension Hunting Extension Hunting Description Automatically route calls to co-workers that work closely together. Extension Hunting routes calls to a predefined group of hunt group member extensions. A call rings in sequence through the hunt group until answered at a member extension. Extension Hunting is helpful, for example, for a group of co-workers that share responsibility for answering calls. Each call cycles through the group until an available member picks it up.
Extension Hunting Circular Hunting Notes: ❥ For type 3 hunting, an Intercom call will stop hunting when it voice-announces. Extension Hunting follows the Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing setup at each extension. ❥ Placing an extension in DND temporarily removes it from the Circular Hunting group. Terminal Hunting Just like Circular Hunting, there are four types of Terminal Hunting: ❥ Ring No Answer Outside Calls (Option 1) Hunting will occur for unanswered outside calls.
Extension Hunting ❥ ❥ ❥ ❥ Calls to the “dummy” extension activate the Call Coverage keys on the covering extensions. Co-workers can transfer calls into the group. They will ring all Call Coverage keys for the group. If unanswered, a call transferred into the group follows the programmed UCD Group overflow destination (as do unanswered calls). It will not recall to the transferring party.
Extension Hunting Programming Setting Up Circular Hunting 1. Assign the hunt type to each extension in a Circular Hunting Group? 2. Features 1. In 2115-01: Hunt Type (page 746), assign the hunt type for each extension in the group. - 1 = Ring No Answer Outside Calls - 2 = Busy/Ring No Answer Outside Calls - 3 = Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls - 4 = Busy Outside Calls Set up the hunt destination routing. 1. In 2115-01: Hunt Destination (page 746), set up the circular hunt routing.
Extension Hunting 3. Do calls ring a hunt group member for the correct interval before routing to the next extension? 1. If yes: - Leave 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (page 670) and 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) at their current settings. 2. If no: - To change how long the first member of the group rings, adjust 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) as required.
Extension Hunting Setting Up UCD Hunting 1. Assign hunt type 05 to each member of the UCD Group. 1. In 2115-01: Hunt Type (page 746), make sure each extension in the UCD Group has hunt type 05. 2. Make sure all group members have the same master extension number. 1. In 2115-01: UCD Group Master Number (page 746), make sure each extension in the same UCD Group 3. Features has the same master number. - Normally, group 1 (master number 700) is reserved for voice mail.
Extension Hunting Extension Hunting Timers The following diagrams show how the system implements various timers when handling Extension Hunting calls. Transfer to Hunt Group Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting Call transferred into hunt group. 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) Call rings first member for Transfer Recall time.
Extension Hunting Transfer to Hunt Group Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting Routing to Busy UCD Group with Overflow Call transferred to extension A, which is the single member of a type 3 hunt group that is set up to hunt to extension B. Extension B Call rings extension A for the Transfer Recall time. If unanswered at extension A, the call hunts to extension B which is the single member to a type 5 UCD Group that is set up to overflow to extension C.
Extension Hunting DIL (no overflow) to Hunt Group Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting DIL (with no overflow) directly rings hunt group member. 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) DIL rings programmed DIL destination for the DIL No Answer time. 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) If unanswered, call rings the next and succeeding members for the DIL No Answer time. If still unanswered, call diverts to Key Ring.
Extension Hunting Outside Call on Hold at Hunt Group Member Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting Hunt group member puts outside call on Hold. 1603-02: Hold Recall Timer (page 675) Features 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer (page 669) If not picked up, outside call recalls the extension that put it on Hold after the Hold Recall time. The call then rings the extension that put it on Hold for the Line No Answer time. If still unanswered, call diverts to Key Ring.
Extension Hunting Night Service / Night Ring (page 252) To put DILs to a UCD Group master number into the night mode, press a uniquely programmed UCD Master Night key. Transfer (page 358) • Outside calls transferred to a Terminal or Circular Hunting group member activate hunting. In addition, outside calls transferred to a UCD Group master number activate hunting. • When handling Transfer recalls, Call Forwarding has priority over Extension Hunting.
Extension Hunting Operation Sending a Call to a Terminal or Circular Hunting Group In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To send a call to a Terminal or Circular Hunting Group: 1. Do one of the following. Transfer an outside call to a hunt group member. b. Set up a DIL to a hunt group member. c. Place a ringing Intercom call to a hunt group member. d. Set up a hunt group member as a line’s overflow destination. Sending a Call to a UCD Group Features a.
Extension Locking Extension Locking Description When they leave the office, a keyset user can secure their phone to prevent unauthorized use. Extension Locking allows a keyset extension user to secure their phone when they leave the office. The user may want to do this if their phone has Toll Restriction and Class of Service options enabled that could be easily abused. While locked, the restrictions set up in Class of Service 15 and Toll Level 7 are in force at the extension.
Extension Locking Operation Locking and Unlocking Your Extension In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To lock your extension: 1. Press INTERCOM and dial ##5. • While your extension is locked, DND winks on and you hear pulsating dial tone when you press INTERCOM. Features To unlock your extension: 1. Press INTERCOM and dial ##5. Your hear pulsating dial tone when you press INTERCOM. 2. When you see ENTER PIN CODE: • Enter your PIN number + HOLD.
Extension Locking Unlocking an Extension from the Attendant’s Phone In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To unlock an extension (and clear the extension’s PIN number) from the attendant’s phone: 1. Press INTERCOM and dial ##3. • You must have a PIN number entered for your phone to use this feature. 2. When you see ENTER PIN CODE: • Enter your PIN number + HOLD. 3. When you see ENTER EXTENSION: • Enter the number of the extension you want to unlock + HOLD. 4.
Feature Keys Feature Keys Description Feature Keys simplify feature operation. Each keyset has Feature Keys. These Feature Keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of any keyset’s Feature Keys from the system program and the User Programmable Features. Features The 22-Button Standard and Display Telephones feature 12 Feature Keys. The 34-Button Display Telephone features 24 Feature Keys.
Feature Keys • Headset key • Night key • Split • Hotline • Page Zones • Voice Mail Conversation Record Conditions • If you unplug a 34-button telephone and replace it with a 22-button telephone, Feature Keys 13-24 are inaccessible. However, the system still retains the programming for those keys. Default Setting • In DSX-80/160, keys 1-12 are line keys for lines 1-12 and keys 13-24 are undefined. • In DSX-40, keys 1-8 are line keys for lines 1-8 and keys 9-24 are undefined.
Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 2 of 6) Key Type Loop Key (Fixed) (page 233) Description Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Fixed Loop key. Key Code and Data Operation 02 + nn (Line Group 90-98) Line (page 227) Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a line key. 03 + nn (line number 1-64) • Press the key to place or answer call. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line is idle or not installed. On (red) . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 3 of 6) Key Type Call Coverage No Ring (page 40) Description Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key. Key Code and Data 07 + nnn (extension number) Operation • Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Covered extension is idle. On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Covered extension is busy. Slow Flash . . . . . . . . .
Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 4 of 6) Description Key Code and Data System Speed Dial Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a System Speed Dial key. You assign the key to specific System Speed Dial bin. • There is no BLF for this key type. 14 + nnn (bin 001999) • Press key to dial stored number. Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Personal Speed Dial key. You assign the key to a specific Personal Speed Dial bin. • There is no BLF for this key type.
Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 5 of 6) Key Type Reverse Voice Over Key (page 289) Description Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Reverse Voice Over key. Key Code and Data 23 + nnn (extension number) Operation • While on a handset call, press key to place a private Intercom call to covered extension. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigned extension is idle. On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigned extension is busy or ringing. Medium Flash . . .
Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 6 of 6) Key Type Headset (page 198) Description Key Code and Data Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Headset key. 28 Operation • Press key to enable or disable headset mode. Features Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension is not in the headset mode. On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension is in the headset mode.
Feature Keys Speed Dial (page 315) An extension can have keys for Personal and System Speed Dial bins. Voice Mail (page 372) An extension can have voice mail Record and Message Center keys. IntraMail Features None Operation See Extension Feature Key Assignments (page 170).
Flash Flash Description Extension users can access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting line loop current. Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting line loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco.
Flash Other Related Features Features Call Timer (page 55) Flash restarts the Call Timer. PBX / Centrex Compatibility (page 270) Flash allows an extension user to access certain telco or PBX features. Toll Restriction (page 351) When an extension user with Toll Restriction enabled flashes a line, the system enforces toll Restriction on any digits the user dials from the new dial tone.
Flexible Numbering Plan Flexible Numbering Plan Description Change the digits users dial for co-workers and other features. The system’s Flexible Numbering Plan allows you to change the digits users dial to reach the attendant, other co-worker’s, outside lines, UCD Groups, and Ring Groups. The following chart shows the areas of the system number plan you can change.
Flexible Numbering Plan Programming 1. Do you want to change the digit(s) users dial to reach system operator(s)? 1. In yes: - In 1301-[01-10]: Function Type (page 620), assign another digit (except 3) to type 1 (operator access). - In 1301-[01-10]: Expected Number of Digits (page 620), change the expected digits option for the new digit to 2. - Be sure your choice does not affect other system operations. 2. If no, leave the above options at their default settings. 2.
Flexible Numbering Plan 6. Do you want to change the Intercom extension number range? 1. If yes: 6. Do you want to swap the extension numbers of two telephones? 1. See 9031-Station Swap (page 925). Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) Change the digits users dial to reach the system operators (normally 0 or 01-04). Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) Change the digits users dial to access a Line Group for an outside call (normally 90-98).
Forced Line Disconnect Forced Line Disconnect Description Disconnect a co-worker’s outside call in an emergency. Forced Line Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension’s active outside call. Forced Line Disconnect lets a user access a busy line in an emergency, when no other lines are available. Maintenance technicians can also use Forced Line Disconnect to release a line on which there is no conversation.
Forced Line Disconnect Operation Using Forced Line Disconnect In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To disconnect a busy line: 1. a. Press the line key for the busy line. b. Press INTERCOM and dial the line’s extension number (e.g., 101 for line 1). Features 2. Do one of the following. When you hear busy tone, dial # to disconnect the line. • You hear Intercom dial tone and the line key goes out. • You can now place a new call on the line.
Group Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Description Easily answer a call ringing your Pickup Group, even if you don’t know which extension is ringing. Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in their assigned Pickup Group. This permits co-workers in the same Pickup Group to easily answer each other’s ringing calls. The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed Group Call Pickup key.
Group Call Pickup 3. Setting up Group Call Pickup keys on a keyset. 1. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758): - For an Immediate Ring Group Call Pickup key, assign key code 09. - For a No Ring (Lamp Only) Group Call Pickup key, assign key code 10. - For a Delay Ring Group Call Pickup key, assign key code 11. 2. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the number of the Pickup Group (1-8) the key will cover. Setting up Group Call Pickup keys on a DSS Console. 1.
Group Call Pickup Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Answering a Pickup Group Call To answer a call ringing a phone in your Pickup Group: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Do one of the following. a. Press the flashing Group Call Pickup key. b. Press INTERCOM and dial *#.
Group Listen Group Listen Description Use Group Listen to talk to an important client or customer and have your co-workers listen in on the meeting. Programming 1. Disable the headset mode for extensions that should be able to use Group Listen. 1. In 2112-02: Headset Mode (page 735), enter No. - Extensions in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen. Other Related Features Features Headset Compatibility (page 198) Group Listen is not available to extensions in the headset mode.
Group Listen Operation Using Group Listen In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up Group Listen: 1. Place or answer a call using the handset. 2. Press SPEAKER twice (but do not hang up). • SPEAKER flashes slowly red. 3. Talk to the caller through your handset. • You and your co-workers hear your caller’s voice over your telephone speaker. • Your handsfree microphone and handset receiver are off. To talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen: 1.
Group Ring Group Ring Description Use Group Ring to call a group of co-worker’s simultaneously. The system provides up to 8 Ring Groups (1-8). The Ring Group master numbers are predefined as 600-607, but can be any valid extension number not already in use. Overflow for Group Ring Calls If unanswered, DILs to a Ring Group can route to a programmed overflow destination. The overflow destination can be an extension, another Ring Group, UCD Group or voice mail.
Group Ring Programming Basic Programming 1. Should an extension be in a Ring Group? 1. If yes, in 2113-02: Ring Group (page 738) enter the Ring Group (1-8) to which the extension belongs. 2. If no, in 2113-02: Ring Group (page 738) enter 0. 2. Do you want to enter a name for a Ring Group? 1. If yes, in 2201-01: Ring Group Name (page 779) enter the Ring Group name. - The name shows on a keyset user’s display when they call the Ring Group. 2.
Group Ring Setting Up Ring Group DILs 1. Should a DIL route to a Ring Group during the day? 1. If yes, in 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819) enter the Ring Group master number. - Use a System Night key to switch a DIL to a Ring Group from day to night mode. 2. If no, in 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819) enter a day destination other than a Ring Group master number. Should overflow occur for a DIL to a Ring Group that is unanswered during the day? 1.
Group Ring Adjusting Ring Group Timers 1. If a Ring Group DIL is unanswered, does the call divert to its overflow destination after the proper interval? 1. If yes, leave 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer (page 669) at its current setting. 2. If no, change 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer (page 669) as required. 2. If a DIL is unanswered at the overflow destination, does the call divert to Key Ring after the proper interval? 1. If yes, leave 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) at it’s current setting. 2.
Group Ring Operation Placing and Transferring Ring Group Calls Placing an Intercom Call to a Ring Group In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To make an Intercom call to a Ring Group: Lift handset and press INTERCOM. 2. Dial the Ring Group number (e.g., 600). 3. Wait for co-worker to answer. • If all Ring Group members are busy, your call will continue to ring until a group member becomes free. Transferring a Call to a Ring Group Features 1.
Group Ring Answering Ring Group Calls Answer a Call to a Ring Group In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call ringing your Ring Group: 1. Do one of the following: a. If the call doesn’t appear on a line or loop key: Lift handset. b. If the call appears on a line or loop key: Press the flashing line or loop key.
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Description - Talk over the phone Handsfree, using the built-in speaker and microphone. - With Handsfree Answerback, answer an Intercom call by just speaking toward your phone. Handsfree Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset.
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Other Related Features Features Automatic Handsfree (page 30) Automatic Handsfree allows a keyset user to place or answer a call Handsfree by just pressing a key — without pressing SPEAKER first. Headset Compatibility (page 198) Handsfree is not available to extensions in the headset mode. Handsfree Answerback is still available — depending on system programming.
Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Setting Up Incoming Voice Announcements a. In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To turn incoming voice announcements on: [On + EXIT] [On + EXIT] b. To turn incoming voice announcements off: [Off + EXIT] [Off + EXIT] Features User Programmable Feature Setting Up Incoming Voice Announcements Feature Mnemonic Handsfree Answerback #VA (#82) Operation Access Level #VA + V for voice announce or R for ring + SPEAKER to 3-5 exit.
Headset Compatibility Headset Compatibility Description Have the privacy of a handset call without having to hold the handset. A keyset user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using Handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, the headset provides privacy not available from Handsfree. Headset Compatibility also provides the following features.
Headset Compatibility Headset Key A keyset user can have a Feature Key on their telephone or DSS Console assigned as a Headset key. The user presses the key to enable or disable the headset mode, as an alternative to using the #HL User Programmable Feature. The key lights while the extension is in the Headset mode, and is off while the Headset mode is disabled. If an extension user is on a call, pressing the Headset key automatically switches the active call to the headset.
Headset Compatibility Programming 1. Optionally assign a Headset key to an extension or DSS Console Feature Key. 1. To assign a Headset key to an extension Feature Key: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), to assign the key as a Headset key enter 28. (There is no associated Data entry.) 2. To assign a Headset key to a DSS Console Feature Key: - In 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Codes (page 801), to assign the key as a Headset key enter 28. (There is no associated Data entry.) 2.
Headset Compatibility Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using the Headset To connect the headset: 1. Plug a compatible headset into the telephone headset jack. Features To turn the headset mode on and off: 1. Do one of the following. a. Press the headset Feature Key on your telephone or DSS Console. b. Use the User Programmable Features (see below). While in the headset mode: 1. You can do the following. a.
Hold Hold Description Have a call wait on Hold, then pick it up to continue the conversation. Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold, the extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Outside calls left on Hold too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold. If the recall is unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring.
Hold Hold Recall Display The Hold recall display identifies: ❥ The type of call recalling the extension. ❥ The extension which initially placed the call on Hold. Programming 1. While busy on a call, should pressing a line key or Call Coverage key put the initial call on Hold? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, 1411-03: Automatic Hold (page 647) enter Yes. 3. If no, in 1411-03: Automatic Hold (page 647) enter No. 2.
Hold Other Related Features Features Call Timer (page 55) A user’s Call Timer starts when they pick up a call from Hold. If they place the call on Hold and another user picks it up, the timer restarts for the new user. Conference (page 89) If an extension user places a Conference on Hold, no other participants can place the Conference on Hold, split it, or terminate it. Directed Call Pickup (page 129) Directed Call Pickup can pick up Hold recalls.
Hold Using System Hold 1. Lift the handset and press INTERCOM. 2. Dial *4. 3. Dial the number of the line that is on Hold. • For example, dial 01 for line 1. Using Exclusive Hold In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Features In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold: 1. Press HOLD twice. • For you, the line key winks (on green) while on Hold, flashes slowly while recalling.
Hold Using Hold at a Single Line Telephone In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To retrieve your call from Exclusive Hold: 1. Lift the handset and dial *7. To pick up an outside call on system Hold at a co-worker’s extension: • You must know the number of the line that is on Hold. 1. Lift the handset and dial *4. 2. Dial *4. 3. Dial the number of the line that is on Hold. • For example, dial 01 for line 1.
Hotline Hotline Description Hotline provides partner extensions with one-button calling and Transfer. Hotline gives a keyset user with a programmed Hotline key one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a single key.
Hotline 2. Specify the type of Off-Hook Signaling available when a user presses the Hotline key for their busy Hotline partner. 1. For Voice Over, in 2116-02: Off Hook Signaling for Calls from Hotline Partner (page 749) enter 2. 2. For Camp-On, in 2116-02: Off Hook Signaling for Calls from Hotline Partner (page 749) enter 1. 3. For no signaling, in 2116-02: Off Hook Signaling for Calls from Hotline Partner (page 749) enter 0. Hotline Automatic Transfer 1.
Hotline Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using Hotline To place a call to your Hotline partner: 1. Press your Hotline key. Features To transfer a call to your Hotline partner: 1. While on a call, press your Hotline key. 2. Do one of the following. 3. a. If your partner answers, announce the call, press TRANSFER. • If your extension has Hotline Automatic Transfer, just announce the call and hang up. b.
Interactive Soft Keys Interactive Soft Keys Description Use advanced features just by pressing a soft key, without remembering feature codes. Interactive Soft Keys provide intuitive feature access. It is no longer necessary to remember feature codes to access the telephone’s advanced features because the function of the soft keys change as the user process calls. For example, while on an outside call a display keyset user can press the PARK soft key to Park their call in orbit.
Intercom Intercom Description Use Intercom to call any co-worker. Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete internal calling capability. Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing Forced Intercom Ringing causes an Intercom call to ring the destination extension. You can enable Forced Intercom Ringing system-wide (for all extensions), or a user can dial a code to have their Intercom call ring the destination.
Intercom Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) Designate each extension’s operator. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) A user can press a Call Coverage Key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) A user can Camp-On after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker. Callback (page 61) A user can leave a Callback request after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker.
Intercom Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Placing and Answering Intercom Calls To place an Intercom call: 1. Lift handset and press INTERCOM. 2. Dial your co-worker’s extension number (300-427). To answer an intercom call: 1. Do one of the following a. If you hear two beeps (your phone has Handsfree Answerback): • Speak toward the phone. OR • Lift handset for privacy. b.
Key Ring Key Ring Description So they are not forgotten, unanswered calls automatically ring co-worker’s extensions. A Key Ring line rings an extension according to the settings in 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (page 764). Multiple extensions can be enabled to ring immediately or after a programmed delay for each incoming line call. In addition, under certain conditions other types of outside calls divert to Key Ring if unanswered.
Key Ring Programming 1. Should extension have Key Ring for the outside line? 1. If yes: 2. Features - In 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (page 764) enter one of the following:- 1 for day and night ringing - 2 for night only ringing - 3 for delayed day and night ringing - For day mode Key Ring, in 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819) press CLEAR. - For night mode Key Ring, in 3112-04: Direct Termination at Night (page 820) press CLEAR.
Key Ring Other Related Features Features Call Coverage Keys (page 40) Call Coverage will pick up Key Ring calls. Call Forwarding (page 44) A Key Ring call will not follow an extension’s Call Forwarding. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) A Key Ring call will not send Camp-On beeps to a busy extension that normally rings for that call. Direct Inward Line (page 109) An unanswered DIL reverts to all extensions with Key Ring for the line.
Language Selection Language Selection Description Set up a telephone to show displays and soft keys in English or Spanish. Language Selection provides telephone displays for soft keys and system programming in English and Spanish. You can select the language for each extension in system programming, or the extension user can choose their language via the soft keys. Language Selection allows the system to easily accommodate bilingual installations (English and Spanish).
Language Selection Programming 1. Should extension be able to set their display language? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1401-11: Language Programming (page 631) enter Yes. 3. If no, in 1401-11: Language Programming (page 631) enter No. From system programming, do you want to set an extensions display language as English or Spanish? 2. 1. For English, in 2101-03: Station Display Language (page 722) enter 1. 2.
Last Number Redial Last Number Redial Description Quickly redial the last number dialed. Enhanced Last Number Redial If enabled, Enhanced Last Number Redial allows the extension user to select from the last 5 outside numbers dialed. When the user places an outside call, the number dialed is stored in the Enhanced Last Number Redial buffer.
Last Number Redial Programming 1. Enable outgoing access on each line the user should use for Last Number Redial. 1. In 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763), enter one of the following: - 2 for outgoing access only - 3 for full access 2. Should extension be able to use Enhanced Last Number Redial? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1411-04: Enhanced Last Number Redial (page 648) enter Yes. 3.
Last Number Redial Operation Using Last Number Redial In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To redial your last call: Lift the handset. 2. (Optional) Press an idle line key to preselect a line. • If you skip this step, the system automatically selects a line from the same group as your initial call. 3. Press REDIAL. • If you hear busy tone and your extension has Line Queuing, you can dial 2 to queue for a line to become free.
Last Number Redial Using Enhanced Last Number Redial 3. In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] The system tries to use the same line as that used for your initial call. • If that line is busy, the system automatically selects a line from the same group as your initial call. • If you hear busy tone and your extension has Line Queuing, you can dial 2 to queue for a line to become free. If you hang up, the system converts the queue to a Line Callback.
Line Group Routing Line Group Routing Description Dial a single code to place a call over the first available line in a Line Group. DSX-80/160 • Lines 1-12 ring on line keys 1-12 for extensions 300-315. All other extensions are lamp only for lines 1-12. Lines 13-64 do not appear on line keys. • All extensions have full access on all lines. • Line Group Routing (dial 9) is assigned to Line Group 90 (which contains lines 1-8). Dial 9 works by default.
Line Group Routing Programming 1. Check the extension’s dial 9 Line Group assignment. 1. In 2113-01: Dial 9 Group (page 738), check the extension’s dial 9 group assignment. - By default, all extensions use group 90. 2. In 3201-[01-64]: Line Group (page 833), be sure there are lines assigned to the extension’s dial 9 group. - A line can be in more than one group. 2. Make sure the extension has access to the assigned dial 9 group. 1.
Line Groups Line Groups Description Dial codes to access Line Groups for outgoing calls. Extension users can optionally dial Line Group access codes 90-98 to select an available line in the group for outgoing calls. This is helpful in applications that have different services arranged into Line Groups. For example, dialing 90 could access a group of DDD lines for local calls, and dialing 91 could access a group of WATS lines for long distance calls.
Line Groups Programming 1. Verify the Line Group configurations. 3. In 3201-[01-64]: Line Group (page 833), be sure lines are properly assigned to their respective groups. - A line can be in more than one group. 2. Make sure the extension has access to the Line Groups. 1. In 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763), enter 2 (outgoing) or 3 (full) for each line the extension should be able to access. 2.
Line Keys Line Keys Description Press a line key for one-touch access to an outside line. A line key provides an extension user with one-button access to outside lines. The extension user just presses a line key to place or answer a call on the line. There is no need to dial codes to access or intercept outside calls. In addition, a line key provides a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for the line to which it is assigned (see the table below).
Line Keys Programming 1. Set up line keys for the extension or DSS Console. 1. To set up a line key on an extension: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 03. - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the line number (1-64). 2. To set up a line key on a DSS Console: - In 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Codes (page 801), enter 03. - In 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Data (page 801), enter the line number (1-64). 3.
Line Keys Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using your Line Keys To place a call using a line key: Lift the handset. 2. Press the line key. 3. Dial the outside number. Features 1. To answer an incoming call using a line key. 1. Listen for ringing and look for the flashing line key. • Line keys that flash red are for you and your co-workers. • Line keys that flash green are just for you (such as DILs and transfers). 2. Lift the handset. 3.
Line Queuing / Line Callback Line Queuing / Line Callback Description - When all lines are busy, Line Queuing lets a user wait in line for a line to become free. - Line Callback will automatically call the user back when a line is available. Line Queuing Line Queueing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy line or Line Group to become free. The system connects the queued extension as soon as the line is available. The user does not have to manually retry the line later.
Line Queuing / Line Callback Programming 1. Should extension be able to queue for a busy line? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1411-01: Camp-On to Busy Lines (page 647) enter Yes. - This option does not restrict Line Callback. 3. If no, in 1411-01: Camp-On to Busy Lines (page 647) enter No. Features 2. Should extension have Line Queuing Priority? 1.
Line Queuing / Line Callback Operation Using Line Queuing and Line Callback In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To queue or leave a callback for a busy line: 1. 2. 3. 232 Do one of the following. a. Press the line key for the busy line. b. Press INTERCOM and dial the Direct Line Access code (e.g., 101 for line 1). Dial 2 and do one of the following. a. Wait on the line without hanging up for Line Queuing. b. Hang up for Line Callback.
Loop Keys Loop Keys Description Loop keys simplify answering and placing calls. Loop keys are Feature Keys that simplify the way extension users place and answer outside calls. There are two types of loop keys: Switched Loop keys and Fixed Loop keys. Switched Loop Keys For outgoing calls, Switched Loop keys provide convenient access to Line Groups. For example, instead of pressing INTERCOM and dialing 90 for Line Group 90, the user can just press the Switched Loop key and dial 0 instead.
Loop Keys Programming 1. To set up a Switched Loop key: 1. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 01. - There is no Data entry. 2. To set up a Fixed Loop key: 1. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 02. 1. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the Line Group number for the key (90-98). 2. In 3201-[01-64]: Line Group (page 833), make sure there are lines assigned to the group above. 3.
Loop Keys Ringing Line Preference (page 295) Ringing Line Preference allows an extension user to answer a call ringing a loop key just by lifting the handset. IntraMail Features None Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Features Using Loop Keys To answer a call on a loop key: 1. Listen for ringing and look for the flashing (red) loop key. 2. Lift the handset. 3. Press the loop key. • The loop key will light green after you answer.
Meet-Me Conference Meet-Me Conference Description Set up a multiple-party telephone conversation with your co-workers. With Meet-Me Conference, an extension user can set up a telephone meeting with their co-workers. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Conference code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting — without leaving the office. Users must join the meeting within the Meet-Me Conference interval. The system has two Meet-Me Conference codes (#11 and #12).
Meet-Me Conference IntraMail Features None Operation Using Meet-Me Conference In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up a Meet-Me Conference: Page parties and announce the Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12). 2. Do one of the following. • You and your co-workers must join the conference within the Meet-Me Conference time. • INTERCOM flashes fast (green) after the first party joins the Conference; goes out after additional parties join. a.
Message Waiting Message Waiting Description For systems without voice mail, leave a Message Waiting request for a return call. An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing V-MAIL key and Ring/Message lamp at the called extension. Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication. Message Waiting ensures that a user will not have to recall an unanswered extension.
Message Waiting Programming 1. Should the system have Message Waiting capability? 1. If yes, in 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863) enter 0. 2. Features - The system can have either Message Waiting or voice mail, not both. 1. If no, in 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863) enter on of the following: - 1 for Built-In Automated Attendant - 2 for IntraMail - 3 for UltraMail (DSX-80/160 only) - 4 for external Should a single line set have special dial tone when a it has a message waiting left? 1.
Message Waiting Operation Using Message Waiting In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To leave a Message Waiting: 1. Place Intercom call to a co-worker. • The extension you call can be unanswered, busy, or in Do Not Disturb. 2. Press V-MAIL. 3. Hang up. To answer a Message Waiting: 1. Look at your V-MAIL key and Ring/Message Lamp - they should be flashing (red). 2. Press INTERCOM + V-MAIL.
Microphone Mute Microphone Mute Description Talk to a co-worker in your office without your caller hearing the conversation. While an extension has their microphone muted, an incoming voice-announced Intercom call announces with a single beep (splash tone). Handsfree Reply Soft Key Display keyset users can press their HF Reply (Hfrp) soft key to turn off their telephone’s Handsfree microphone for incoming Intercom calls.
Microphone Mute Operation Using Microphone Mute In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To activate or deactivate Microphone Mute: 1. Press MUTE. • You can do this any time while on the phone or idle (except when an Intercom call is ringing). • Microphone Mute automatically cancels when you lift the handset. • If you are in the headset mode, Microphone Mute cancels when you press SPEAKER. To turn off your telephone’s microphone for incoming Intercom calls: 1.
Monitor / Silent Monitor Monitor / Silent Monitor Description Monitor a co-worker’s phone conversation without them knowing you are on the phone. Monitor lets an extension user listen to the conversation at a busy extension. To implement Monitor, an extension user just calls a busy extension and dials the Monitor code. The busy extension and their caller have no indication of the intrusion. There are no tones heard and there is no visual indication that monitoring is occurring.
Monitor / Silent Monitor Operation Using Monitor / Silent Monitor In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Monitor a call: 1. Place an Intercom call to the busy extension. • Listen for busy or busy/ring tone. 2. Dial 6. 3. Listen to the conversation in progress.
Multiple Directory Numbers Multiple Directory Numbers Description See Call Coverage Keys (page 40) for more.
Music on Hold Music on Hold Description Callers can listen to music while waiting for their call to go through. Music on Hold (MOH) plays music to calls on Hold, parked calls, and transferred calls. The music lets the caller know that their call is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these types of calls.
Music on Hold Programming 1. Should the system have Music on Hold? 1. If yes, 1521-01: Enable Music on Hold (page 659) enter Yes. 2. If no, in 1521-01: Enable Music on Hold (page 659) enter No. 2. Assign the Music on Hold Source to each line. Features 1. In 3103-05: Music On Hold Source (page 816), assign the MOH source: - 0 for none - 1 for audio input minijack 1 - 2 for audio input minijack 2 - 3 for internal tone 1 - 4 for internal tone 2 - 5 for IntraMail Message On Hold.
Music on Hold Operation Music on Hold is automatic once enabled.
Names for Extensions and Lines Names for Extensions and Lines Description Names help identify lines and extensions. Extensions and lines can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a keyset’s display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and line names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls.
Names for Extensions and Lines 2201-01: Ring Group Name (page 779) 2301-01: UCD Group Name (page 790) 2501-[01-16]: Selectable Display Messages (page 806) 3101-02: Line Name (page 810) 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name (page 865) 904x-Backup/Restore (page 927) ❥ ❥ ❥ ❥ ❥ ❥ Other Related Features See list under Description above.
Names for Extensions and Lines Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 1 & - / ‘ 1 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y 0 space : 0 # Not used * Not used 8 Times 9 Times s 7 z 9 Features Key After select
Night Service / Night Ring Night Service / Night Ring Description Use Night Service to reroute calls after hours. Night Service redirects outside calls to their night mode destination. Typically, the attendant or supervisor activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. Lines can ring extensions directly at Night, providing specific answering points for Night Service calls. (For example, you can program lines to ring the security station at night.
Night Service / Night Ring Option 4: DIL Day and Night The line is a DIL during the day and at night. The DIL destination’s DND key controls the night mode of the line. Turn to Direct Inward Line (page 109) for more on setting up Direct Inward Lines. Conditions • None. Default Setting • In DSX-40, keys 1-12 are day/night ringing line keys for lines 1-12 and keys 13-24 are undefined. • In DSX-80/160, keys 1-8 are day/night ringing line keys for lines 1-8 and keys 9-24 are undefined.
Night Service / Night Ring Other Related Features Features Direct Inward Line (page 109) • The extension to which the DIL is terminated controls the night mode of the DIL. • If a DIL is terminated to the voice mail master number, a UCD night key (code 18 + the voice mail master number) controls the night mode status of the DIL. Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120) A DSS Console with a System night key can put the system in the night mode.
Off-Hook Signaling Off-Hook Signaling Description Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through. When a user is busy on a call, Off-Hook Signaling indicates that another caller is trying to get through. Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free. After the user hears the off-hook signal, they can use other system features (such as Hold or Park) to process their active call and then answer the waiting call.
Off-Hook Signaling Default Setting • Off-Hook Signaling for outside calls is set for Off-Hook Ringing (option 2) by default. While busy on a call, the extension will receive Off-Hook Ringing for outside calls that normally ring the phone. This includes: - Key Ring calls - Transferred outside calls - Direct Inward Lines - UTRF transfers from voice mail - Call Coverage keys - Group Call Pickup keys • Off-Hook Signaling for Intercom calls is Camp-On tones.
Off-Hook Signaling Operation User Programmable Feature Setting Up Off-Hook Signaling Feature Mnemonic Off-Hook Signaling #OHR (#647) DSX Software Manual Operation #OHR + Select mode (see below) + Select option (see below) + SPEAKER to exit.
One-Touch Keys One-Touch Keys Description Available for Personal Speed Dial. See Speed Dial (page 315) for more.
Paging Paging Description Use Paging to broadcast announcements or quickly locate co-workers. Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users and to external Paging speakers. Paging allows a user to locate a co-worker or make an announcement without calling each extension individually. There are two types of Paging: Internal Paging and External Paging. Internal Paging To simplify Paging access, a keyset can have Feature Keys assigned as Page keys.
Paging The equipment you connect to a system relay must be compatible with the following specifications. Refer to your system’s Hardware Manual for more on connecting to the system relay contacts. Relay Contact Specifications DSX-40 Contact Configuration: Normally open Maximum Load: 0.
Paging Conditions • None Default Setting • All Call and Zone Paging allowed. • Ringing, Door Box chimes, and Background Music do not broadcast over External Paging. Programming 1. Features Basic Programming Should extension be able to receive Paging announcements? 1. If yes: - In 2113-05: Page Group (Zone) (page 740), assign the zone to which the extension belongs (1-7 or 0 for All Call only). - In 2112-06: Paging Through Speaker (page 737), enter Yes. 2.
Paging - For relay 2, in 2101-06: Door Relay Assignment (page 723) for the Door Box extension enter 2. 2. If no, in 2101-06: Door Relay Assignment (page 723) for the Door Box extension, enter 0. External Paging Options 1. Optionally enable outside line ringing over External Paging. 1. In 1531-01: External Page Ring Type (page 662), enter 2. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. - You can have outside line ringing or Intercom ringing, not both.
Paging 5. Use 1531-05: External Page Gain (page 664) to additionally control the volume of the system’s External Page port audio output. 4. Optionally enable Background Music over External Paging. 1. In 1521-04: Background Music over External Page (page 660), enter Yes. 2. Check Background Music (page 34) to be sure Background Music is programmed and installed. 3.
Paging Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Making a Page Announcement To make an internal Paging announcement: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Do one of the following. 3. a. Press INTERCOM, dial *1, then dial the page zone number (1-7 or 0 for All Call). b Press your Paging key. • If you are on an Intercom call when you press a Paging key, the system disconnects the internal call and activates the page. Make announcement and hang up.
Paging, Meet-Me Conference Paging, Meet-Me Conference Description Available. Refer to Meet-Me Conference (page 236) for more.
Park Park Description Park a call in orbit so a co-worker can pick it up. With Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to handle their calls. Park places an outside call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. There are two types of Park: System and Personal. Use System Park when you want to have the call wait in one of 10 system orbits (60-69). Personal Park allows you to Park a call at an extension so a co-worker can pick it up.
Park Personal Park Orbit Recall Display The Personal Park Orbit recall display shows: ❥ On all extensions that are ringing with the recall: - The type of recall (i.e., Personal Park). ❥ On the extension at which the call is parked (while it is ringing): - The extension which initially parked the call. ❥ On all other extensions as they are ringing with the recall: - The extension at which the call was initially parked.
Park Key Ring (page 214) Unanswered Park recalls divert to Key Ring. Music on Hold (page 246) If installed, Music on Hold plays to parked callers. Off-Hook Signaling (page 255) An extension user can Park their current call and answer the waiting call. Voice Mail (page 372) When an extension user with Ring No Answer/Busy Terminal Hunting to voice mail parks a call at a co-worker’s extension, the call recalls to them if not picked up. If still unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring.
Park Park 2. In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] If a call in Personal Park recalls, you see one of the following. a. If the extension that parked the call doesn’t have a name: b.
PBX / Centrex Compatibility PBX / Centrex Compatibility Description The DSX provides unique features when connected to a PBX or Centrex. PBX/Centrex Access Codes PBX Access Codes are the digits PBX extension users must dial to obtain outside lines. When the DSX is installed behind a PBX, users must dial these codes before the digits for their outside call. For example, if the PBX access code is 98, and the DSX user wants to reach 203-926-5400, they must dial 98-1-203-9265400.
PBX / Centrex Compatibility If 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level = 0 ❥ If an extension user: - Seizes the line, - Dials a valid PBX Access Code, - Dials a number that begins with 0 or 1, DSX requires the user to enter an Account Code for the call. PBX/Centrex Access Codes and SMDR Programming 1. Specify which lines are PBX lines. 1. In 3101-04: PBX Line (page 811), enter Yes. - A line will only use the PBX Access Codes Table in step 2 if it is programmed as a PBX line. 2.
PC Program (System Administrator) PC Program (System Administrator) Description Use your PC or laptop to program the system remotely or while on-site. The PC Program is a WindowsTM-based application you can use for programming the telephone system and maintaining site databases, instead of using the conventional telephone programming.
PC Program (System Administrator) Conditions • N/A Default Setting • N/A Programming N/A Features Other Related Features N/A Operation Refer to the PC Program User’s Guide.
Prime Line Preference Prime Line Preference Description Get dial tone for a new outside or Intercom call just by lifting the handset. Prime Line Preference allows an extension user to place or answer a call by just lifting the handset. The user does not have to press a line key, loop key, or the INTERCOM key first. This simplifies handling calls. In programming, you designate a line key, loop key, the INTERCOM key, a line, or a Line Group as the extension’s Prime Line.
Prime Line Preference Programming 1. Set an extension’s Prime Line type. 1. For key: Features - In 2114-01: Prime Line Type (page 741), enter 1. - In 2114-01: Prime Line Key (page 741), enter the number of a line or loop key: 1-14 for Feature Keys 1-24. 00 for INTERCOM. - This option is not available to single line telephones. 2. For line: - In 2114-01: Prime Line Type (page 741), enter 2. - In 2114-01: Prime Line Line (page 741), enter the line number (1-64).
Prime Line Preference Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using Prime Line Preference To place a call on your Prime Line: 1. Lift the handset. • To bypass your prime line, press another key (such as a line or loop key) before lifting the handset. 2. Dial call normally.
Privacy Privacy Description Use Privacy to prevent interruptions at high priority extensions. An extension with Privacy blocks incoming Barge In attempts and Call Waiting (Camp-On) signals. Privacy helps extension users that don’t want their conversations interrupted. Programming 1. Should an extension have Privacy? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1401-03: Privacy (page 628) enter Yes. 3.
Privacy Release Groups Privacy Release Groups Description Quickly join in a co-worker’s outside call. You can program extensions into Privacy Release Groups to simplify sharing outside calls. Co-workers in the same Privacy Release Group can easily join another group member’s outside call just by pressing the busy line -key. The co-worker immediately joins in unannounced and uninvited. Privacy Release Groups are a quick alternative to Conference where control over the Conference is not required.
Privacy Release Groups Programming 1. Should an extension be in a Privacy Release Group? 1. If yes: Other Related Features Features Privacy (page 277) There is no interaction between Privacy and Privacy Release Groups.
Private Line Private Line Description You can have a line reserved exclusively for your own use. A Private Line is a line reserved for a keyset for placing and answering calls. A user with a Private Line knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own line for placing calls that is not available to others in the system. There are three types of Private Lines: ❥ Incoming Only The keyset has a Private Line only for incoming calls.
Private Line 2. Should Private Line ring for incoming calls? 1. If yes: Other Related Features Features The following features work normally for Private Lines.
Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) Description Customize the Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys to exactly meet the user’s needs. The Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys are customizable in system programming and by the extension user. This allows the idle mode display to be tailored to meet the needs of each Super Display Telephone user. The first chart below shows the default idle menu soft key assignments.
Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) Super Display Telephone Idle Menu Soft Key Options (Page 2 of 2) Entry Display Description 10 SP Dial 2 Press to access Personal Speed Dial bins 711-720. The display shows the Speed Dial number (or name - if programmed). 11-30 PERS SPDL BIN 120 Press to access the associated Personal Speed Dial bin (701-720). The display shows the Speed Dial number (or name - if programmed). Programming 1.
Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) Operation Customizing your Idle Menu Soft keys (Super Display Only) In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] To customize your idle menu soft keys: 1. Do not press any keys and do not lift the handset. 2. Dial #SM (#76). • You see KEY NUMBER?1. 3. Do one of the following. a. Press the soft key you want to program. b. Press Volume Up or Volume Down to scroll through the keys. 4. Press HOLD. 5. Do one of the following. a.
Pulse to Tone Conversion Pulse to Tone Conversion Description Use special services (such as telephone banking) over dial pulse lines. Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering (page 74) and Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) for the specifics on setting up your outside calling. Conditions • None Default Setting • Pulse to Tone Conversion always enabled for dial pulse lines. Programming 1. Set up your dial pulse lines. 1. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809) enter the connected line’s type. 2.
Regional Defaults Regional Defaults Description The system is compatible with both North American and Latin American applications. Use the Regional Defaults capability to switch your system from the North American mode to the Latin American mode. Switching your system to the Latin American mode makes the following changes: ❥ The default language in programming, SMDR, and all telephone displays is Spanish. See the following for more: - Language Selection (page 217).
Removing Lines and Extensions from Service Removing Lines and Extensions from Service Description Temporarily remove problem extensions and lines from service until they can be repaired. Supervisors and attendants can remove problem lines and extensions from service. This helps ensure maximum system performance. For example, the attendant can busy-out a noisy line or problem extension until service personnel can repair the problem. The line or extension the appears busy to all callers.
Removing Lines and Extensions from Service Operation Removing Lines and Extensions from Service In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To remove or return an extension or line to service: 1. Press INTERCOM. 2. Dial #40. 3. Do one of the following. 4. 5. 288 a. Dial the number of the extension you want to remove or return to service (e.g., 302). b. Dial the extension number of the line you want to remove from service (e.g., 101 for line 1). Do one of the following.
Reverse Voice Over Reverse Voice Over Description Privately call a co-worker while you’re busy on your handset. Reverse Voice Over could help a salesperson, for example, when placing a call to an important client. The salesperson can talk with the client and give special instructions to an assistant — without interrupting the initial call. When the keyset is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline key.
Reverse Voice Over Programming 1. To set up Reverse Voice Over keys on an extension: 1. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 23. 2. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the Reverse Voice Over partner’s extension number. Other Related Features Features Conference (page 89) An extension user cannot add an incoming Reverse Voice Over call to a Conference. Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120) A DSS Console can not have a Reverse Voice Over key.
Reverse Voice Over Operation Using Reverse Voice Over In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call using Reverse Voice Over: 1. Features While on a handset call, press and hold your Reverse Voice Over key. • You hear two beeps, then you can talk to your co-worker. • The key lights red as you press it. To return to your initial caller: 1. Release your Reverse Voice Over key. • The key goes out. To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over partner: 1.
Ring Groups Ring Groups Description Available. See Group Ring (page 189).
Ringdown Extension Ringdown Extension Description Call another extension, group or voice mail just by lifting the handset. Programming 1. Optionally set an extension’s Ringdown destination. 1. In 2114-02: Station Ring Down Type (page 743), set the extension’s Ringdown type. - 0 for none - 1 for extension - 2 for Personal Speed Dial - 3 for System Speed Dial 2. In 2114-02: Station Ring Down Destination (page 743), enter the Ringdown destination.
Ringdown Extension Operation Using Ringdown In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To use the Ringdown extension: 1. Lift the handset or press SPEAKER. To bypass Ringdown: 1. 294 Press INTERCOM, a line/loop key, or a Feature Key before lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER.
Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference Description Simply lift the handset to answer a ringing call. Ringing Line Preference lets a keyset user answer a ringing call by just lifting the handset. For a user that primarily answers calls, Ringing Line Preference ensures that ringing calls have priority. The tables below show the interaction between Ringing Line Preference and other features for both handset and headset calls.
Ringing Line Preference Keyset Feature RLP = Y Attendant RLP = N RLP = Y RLP = N Does pressing SPEAKER while in the Headset mode answer the ringing call? Intercom (page 211) Ringing Intercom calls Yes Yes No1 No1 Key Ring (page 214) (Line/Loop Keys) Yes No Yes No Transfer (page 358) Yes No Yes No Direct Inward Line (page 109) Yes No Yes No Group Ring (page 189) Yes Yes N/A N/A Extension Hunting (page 154) (Call to UCD master) Yes Yes No1 No1 Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
Ringing Line Preference Other Related Features Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using Ringing Line Preference To use Ringing Line Preference: 1. Lift the handset or press SPEAKER. • You automatically answer the call. To bypass Ringing Line Preference: 1.
Save Number Dialed Save Number Dialed Description Save the number you just dialed for quick redialing. Save Number Dialed permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place. Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number up to 20 digits.
Save Number Dialed IntraMail Features None Operation Using Save Number Dialed In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To save the outside number you just dialed (up to 32 digits): Features 1. Press the Save Number Dialed key on your extension or DSS Console. To redial a saved number: 1. (Optional) Press a line key to preselect a line key for the call. 2. Press the Save Number Dialed key on your extension or DSS Console.
Selectable Display Messaging Selectable Display Messaging Description While you’re away from the phone, callers can receive personalized text messages you set up. An extension user can select a pre programmed Selectable Display Message for their extension. Keyset callers see the selected message when they call the user’s extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides personalized text messaging. For example, an extension user could select the message “GONE FOR THE DAY.
Selectable Display Messaging Programming 1. Should extension be able to enable Selectable Display Messaging? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter Yes. 3. If no, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter No. - Disabling this option will disable all internal Call Forwarding for the extension. To change the default Selectable Display Messages or create new ones: 1.
Selectable Display Messaging Operation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Setting Up Selectable Display Messaging To select a Selectable Display Message: 1. Select the Call Forwarding options. [Menu + Call Forward] [Menu + Cfwd] 2. 3. Alternately do one of the following: • Press INTERCOM and dial *3. • Press your Call Forwarding Feature Key. Select Selectable Display Messaging.
Selectable Display Messaging Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 1 & - / ‘ 1 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y 0 space : 0 # Not used * Not used 8 Times 9 Times s 7 z 9 Features Key After selectin
Silent Monitor Silent Monitor Description Available. See Monitor / Silent Monitor (page 243) for more.
Single Line Telephones Single Line Telephones Description Connect analog devices such as single line telephones and fax machines to the system. The system is compatible with 500 type (dial pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog telephone devices. This includes on-premises single line telephones (SLTs), fax machines, and modems. Message Waiting Both DSX-40 and DSX-80/160 support FSK Message Waiting lamps. DSX-80/160 also provides support for high voltage Message Waiting lamps – while DSX-40 does not.
Single Line Telephones Programming 1. Should the SLT extension follow the ringing pattern of the incoming line? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1403-02: Single Ring for Single Line Set (page 635) enter Yes. 3. If no, in 1403-02: Single Ring for Single Line Set (page 635) enter No. 2. Does the SLT extension (such as an answering machine) require a loop disconnect signal? 1.
Single Line Telephones Operation Barge In 1. Do one of the following. Call busy extension. b. Dial the line extension number (e.g., 101) for Direct Line Access. c. Dial #9 + Line number for Line Dial-up. d. Dial 9 for Line Group Access. 2. Dial 4. 3. Join the conversation in progress. Features a. Call Forwarding 1. Lift the handset and dial *3. 2. Do one of the following. a. Dial 0 for Cancel your extension’s Call Forwarding. b. Dial 2 for Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer. c.
Single Line Telephones Call Waiting / Camp-On 1. Call busy extension. 2. Dial 2 but do not hang up. • If you hang up, the system converts your Camp-On to a Callback. 3. Speak to your co-worker when they answer their Camp-On ring. Callback 1. Call busy extension. 2. Dial 2 and hang up. • Stay on the line without hanging up if you want to Camp-On instead. 3. When Callback rings your phone, lift handset to answer. 4. Speak to your co-worker when call goes through.
Single Line Telephones Direct Line Access 2. Dial outside number. Directed Call Pickup Lift the handset. 2. Dial **. 3. Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept. • To intercept a call ringing an attendant, dial the attendant’s extension number (e.g., 300); not 0 or 01-04. Features 1. Door Box To place a call to the Door Box: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Door Box extension number. To answer the Door Box ringing: 1. Lift the handset.
Single Line Telephones Group Call Pickup 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial *#. Hold To retrieve a line on System Hold at a co-worker’s extension: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial *4. 3. Dial the number of the line that is on Hold (e.g., 01 for line 1). To place a call on Exclusive Hold: 1. Hookflash and dial *7. 2. Hang up. • If the call is left on Exclusive Hold too long, it will recall to you. • If you hang up without first dialing *7, the call will recall immediately.
Single Line Telephones Meet-Me Conference 3. Dial the announced Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12). • Your co-worker’s must join the telephone meeting within the Meet Me Conference time. To join a Meet-Me Conference: Listen for paged invitation to join the Conference. 2. Dial announced Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12). • You can join the telephone meeting within the Meet Me Conference time. Features 1. Message Waiting To leave a message for a co-worker: 1. Place Intercom call to co-worker.
Single Line Telephones Park To Park a call: 1. Place or answer call. 2. Hookflash and dial *. 3. Dial the orbit number. • System Park Orbits are 60-69. • Personal Park Orbits are *300-*427. To retrieve a parked call: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial *. 3. Dial the orbit number. • System Park Orbits are 60-69. • Personal Park Orbits are *300-*427. Pulse to Tone Conversion This feature must be switched manually from the telephone. The system does not provide Pulse to Tone Conversion for SLTs.
Single Line Telephones Split A single line telephone can Split (alternate) between their current call and waiting calls. The waiting calls can include a call you previously placed on Exclusive Hold or camped-on calls. To Split (Alternate) between your current call and a waiting call: 1. Hookflash and dial *7. • You are connected to your camped-on call (if any) or the call that has been on Hold the longest.
Soft Keys Soft Keys Description Available. SeeInteractive Soft Keys (page 210) for more.
Speed Dial Speed Dial Description Instead of dialing a long telephone number to reach a client or customer, use Speed Dial instead. Also, store Intercom digits for quick access to commonly used features. Speed Dial gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. There are two types of Speed Dial: System and Personal. Speed Dial numbers can be up to 32 digits long, using 0-9, # and *. Every Speed Dial can have a programmed name up to 18 characters long.
Speed Dial Note that this unique Centrex integration also pertains to voice mail ports accessing stored Speed Dial numbers. Chaining Bins for Dialing Long Numbers A Speed Dial number can be up to 32 digits long. The system allows this by automatically using the next adjacent bin for entries longer than 16 digits. For example, assume you want to store a Personal Speed Dial number for a banking service (203-926 5400) followed by a pause and your 10 digit customer code (9876543210).
Speed Dial Programming Setting Up Personal Speed Dial 1. Should extension be able to use Personal Speed Dial? 1. If yes: 2. To enter Personal Speed Dial numbers from system programming: 1. Use 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) (page 775) to assign Personal Speed Dial numbers. - In 2151-[01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Type (page 775), enter the bin type: - 0 for none - 1 for Intercom - 2 for line - 3 for Line Group - 4 for Extend (i.e.
Speed Dial 2. Should the system have 9 (1-digit), 99 (2-digit), or 999 (3-digit) System Speed Dial numbers? 1. For 9 (1-digit), in 1701-01: Number of System Speed Dial Bins (page 714) enter 1. 2. For 99 (2-digit), in 1701-01: Number of System Speed Dial Bins (page 714) enter 2. 3. For 999 (3-digit), in 1701-01: Number of System Speed Dial Bins (page 714) enter 3.
Speed Dial 2. Is a Flash stored in a Speed Dial bin the correct duration? 1. If yes, leave 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (page 686) at its current setting. 2. If no, adjust 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (page 686) as required. 3. Are Speed Dial calls correctly detecting dial tone? 1. If yes, leave 1602-03: Dialtone Detect Timer (page 671) at its current setting. 2. If no, adjust 1602-03: Dialtone Detect Timer (page 671) as required.
Speed Dial Programming and Dialing Personal Speed Dial In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] b. Enter the Line Group number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (90-98). c. Press INTERCOM if you want to enter Intercom codes. 6. Press HOLD. 7. Enter the number you want to store (up to 32 digits long). • If storing Intercom codes, you can enter a valid dial sequence using the digits 0-9, #, and *. • To insert a pause, press MUTE.
Speed Dial Programming and Dialing System Speed Dial In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] a. Enter the line number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (1-64). b. Enter the Line Group number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (90-98). c. Press INTERCOM if you want to enter Intercom codes. Press HOLD. 7. Enter the number you want to store (up to 32 digits long).
Speed Dial Programming System Speed Dial Feature Mnemonic Operation Access Level Speed Dial #SP (#77) #SP + Dial System Speed Dial bin number (e.g., 201) + HOLD + Enter outside line (e.g., 1), Line Group (e.g., 90), or INTERCOM for Intercom feature + HOLD + Number to store + HOLD twice + Name + HOLD + Dial another bin or SPEAKER to exit.
Split (Alternate) Split (Alternate) Description Switch between active calls without Conferencing the calls together. Programming 1. To set up a Split Feature Key: 1. To set up a Split Feature Key on an extension: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 20. - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), do not make an entry. 1. To set up a Split Feature Key on a DSS Console: - In 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Codes (page 801), enter 20.
Split (Alternate) Operation Using Split In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Split between your current Intercom call and a new Intercom call: 1. Press HOLD to place your Intercom call on Hold. 2. Press INTERCOM to answer your new Intercom call. • INTERCOM winks off (green) to indicate that you have an Intercom call on Hold. 3. Press your Split Feature Key to switch between your two Intercom calls. To Split between your current outside call and an Intercom call: 1.
Station Key Telephones Station Key Telephones Description System keysets provide a host of sophisticated extension features. The system offers 22-Button, 34-Button, 34-Button Advanced, and Super Display keyset telephones. All telephone models are available in two colors: black and white.
Station Key Telephones 34-Button Backlit Super Display Telephone with Half-Duplex Speakerphone The Super Display Telephone is the system’s most sophisticated telephone instrument. It features a large 9 line-by24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 12 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation.
Station Key Telephones Programming 1. Extension Circuit Type 1.
Station Message Detail Recording Station Message Detail Recording Description SMDR provides a printed record of your calls. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system’s outside calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and line. This makes charge-back and traffic management easier.
Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Report Format SMDR Report Format (Page 1 of 2) Line Character Field 1-32 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING 33,34 Carriage return, line feed 1-10 Date (mm/dd/yyyy) 11 Space 12-16 Time (hh:mm:ss) 17 A (for am) or P (for pm) 18,19 Carriage return, line feed 1,2 Carriage return, line feed 1-3 - characters 4 + character 5-7 - characters 8 + character 9-40 - characters 41 + character 42-51 - characters 52 + character 53-61 - characters 62
Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Report Format (Page 2 of 2) Line 3 Character Field 72 Space 73 T 74 Space 1-3 - characters 4 + character 5-7 - characters 8 + character 9-40 - characters 41 + character 42-51 - characters 52 + character 53-61 - characters 62 + character 63-70 - characters 71 + character 72-74 - characters 1-3 Extension number 4 | character 5-7 Line number (2 digits, right justified, preceded by one space) 8 | character 9-40 Number dialed (up
Station Message Detail Recording Programming 1. Should the system output SMDR? 1. If yes: 2. Features - In 1541-01: SMDR Port (page 666), enter 1 to enable the RS-232 port to output SMDR. - In 1101-01: Baud Rate (page 603), set the baud rate of the RS-232 port: 1 for 2400 2 for 9600 3 for19,200 4 for 38,400 5 for 57,600 2. If no: In 1541-01: SMDR Port (page 666), enter 0. Should the SMDR report include a header for each new day? 1. If yes, in 1541-02: Print SMDR Headers (page 666) enter Yes. 2.
Station Message Detail Recording Operation SMDR is automatic once enabled.
System Administrator (PC Program) System Administrator (PC Program) Description Available. See PC Program (System Administrator) (page 272) for more.
System Identification System Identification Description Store the site name and telephone number in the system data base. The system administrator can enter the site name and telephone number into the system data base. This information is saved into system memory. Conditions • None Default Setting • No entries. Programming 1. To enter the site name and telephone number into the system data base: 1. In 1011-01: System Name (page 597), enter the site name. 2.
System Programming Backup and Restore System Programming Backup and Restore Description Use a CompactFlash Card to back up and restore the site data. To prevent the loss of essential custom site programming, use a CompactFlash Card plugged into the IntraMail CompactFlash slot to back up the system database. If the need arises, you can restore the system database saved on the card.
System Programming Password Protection System Programming Password Protection Description Control access to system programming. The system controls access to the programmable options according to the programming password the administrator enters.
System Programming Password Protection IntraMail Features None Operation None Features DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 337
T1 Lines T1 Lines Description In DSX-80/160, provides for connection to advanced digital lines and simplifies installation. T1 lines require a unique T1 PCB (P/N 80061) and give the system a maximum of 24 lines in a single PCB slot.
T1 Lines Programming 1. Set the circuit type for each T1 line. 1. Be sure your T1PCB is installed and connected, and that your telco is providing T1 service. 2. Features 2. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), enter the correct circuit type for each T1 line. • 00 for uninstalled • 01 for Loop start • 02 for Ground Start • 03 for DID Wink Start • 04 for DID Immediate Start • 05 for E&M Wink Start • 06 for E&M Immediate Start 3.
T1 Lines 4. To set up T1 lines for compatibility with ANI/DNIS service: 1. To enable ANI-based Caller ID, in 3121-01: Caller ID Type (page 825) enter 3. 2. In 3121-02: ANI/DNIS Format (page 825), specify the type of ANI/DNIS received from the telco: - 0 for no ANI/DNIS data - 1 for ANI - 2 for *ANI* - 3 for *DNIS* - 4 for *ANI*DNIS* 3. In 3121-03: ANI/DNIS Delimiter (page 826), select the type of ANI/DNIS delimiter required by your connected service - This is required only for options 2-4 in step 2.
Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Description Join two callers in Conference, leave the call and let their conversation continue. Tandem Calls allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a line-to-line conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the lines in an Unsupervised Conference. The extension user that established the Conference is not part of the conversation.
Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Other Related Features Features Forced Line Disconnect (page 182) An extension user can end an Unsupervised Conference by using Forced Line Disconnect on one of the lines in the tandem call. Single Line Telephones (page 305) Tandem Calling is available at Single Line extensions.
Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Barging in on a Tandem Call In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Barge In on a Tandem Call: 1. a. Press the line key for the busy line. b. Press INTERCOM and dial the line’s Direct Line Access code (e.g., 101 for line 1). • See Direct Line Access (page 115) for more. Features 2. Do one of the following. Dial 4. • You hear two beeps and you join the Tandem Call. To place a Tandem Call on Hold (after Barging In): 1. Press HOLD.
Tie Lines Tie Lines Description In DSX-80/160, link two systems together for inter-system Intercom calling and other features. Tie lines directly link a local DSX-80/160 telephone system with one or more remote DSX-80/160 systems. The link is independent of the telco's switched network. When a local system user seizes a tie line, they hear Intercom dial tone from the remote system.
Tie Lines 4. Should an incoming tie line restrict the incoming caller from using certain features and dialing certain outgoing calls? 1. To restrict feature access: - In 3102-01: Line Class of Service (page 813), check the tie line’s Class of Service level. - In 14xx-COS (Class of Service) (page 628), restrict Class of Service options as required. 2. To restrict outgoing dialing: - In 3102-02: Line Toll Level (page 813), assign a Toll Level to the tie line.
Tie Lines Operation Call Waiting / Camp-On 1. Access the tie line and call busy extension. 2. Dial 2 but do not hang up. • If you hang up, the system converts your Camp-On to a Callback. 3. Speak to your co-worker when they answer their Camp-On ring. Central Office Calls, Placing 1. Access the tie line. 2. Do one of the following. a. For Direct Line Access: i. b. For Line Group Access: i. 3. Dial 1 followed by the line number (e.g., 101 for line 1). Dial the Line Group code (9 or 90-98).
Tie Lines Intercom To place an Intercom call: 1. Access the tie line. 2. Dial the extension number. • To call the remote system’s operator, dial 0. • The call rings the destination extension. Features Night Service / Night Ring To answer a call ringing over the paging system: 1. Access the tie line. 2. Dial *0. Speed Dial (System) To dial a Speed Dial number in the remote system: 1. Access the tie line. 2. Dial # and the System Speed Dial bin number (e.g., 201-299). 3.
Tie Lines Transfer To transfer your call to a user in the remote system: 1. Place or answer call. • Transferring an outside call over the tie line requires that the tie line have Tandem Calls enabled and that the extension have Unsupervised Conference enabled in their Class of Service. 2. Press TRANSFER, access the tie line, and dial the extension to which you want to Transfer the call. • To Transfer the call to the remote voice mail Automated Attendant, dial the voice mail master number (700). 3.
Time and Date Time and Date Description The Time and Date shows on telephone displays and prints on system reports. Programming 1. To change the time and date from system programming: 1. In 1021-01: System Time (page 599), set the system time. 2. In 1021-02: System Date (page 599), set the system date. 2. Do you want the system to automatically adjust for daylight savings time? 1. If yes, in 1022-01: Automatic Daylight Savings Time Setting (page 600) enter Yes. 2.
Time and Date Other Related Features Features Battery Backup (page 38) The battery on the CPU PCB backs up the CPU Real Time Clock for 10-14 days. Station Message Detail Recording (page 328) Time and date appear on the SMDR report.
Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Description Use Toll Restriction to help you control the costs of outgoing long distance calls. For some common Toll Restriction examples, turn to page 356. The Toll Restriction Tables There are 5 separate tables for each Toll Restriction Level. Each table can hold up to 96 entries. The Toll Restriction Tables can individually restrict: ❥ Equal Access Dialing. ❥ Calls dialed with a leading 1 (1 + Dialing). ❥ Calls dialed without a leading 1.
Toll Restriction The following chart summarizes these tables. Toll Restriction Tables Dialing Type Program Description Equal Access Dialing Program 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) (page 844) Lookup table that restricts 1010 + XXX dialing. Can be set up as an allow or deny table. Example1: 1010 220 203 926 5400 1 + Dialing Program 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) (page 846) 3-digit lookup table that handles restriction for 1 + NPA and 1 + NXX dialing.
Toll Restriction ❥ ❥ Default Toll Restriction Configuration When you assign a Toll Level to an extension, the extension has the following Toll Restriction by default: ❥ Active Key Pad is enabled. ❥ N11 Dialing is enabled. ❥ 0 + Dialing is enabled. ❥ International (011) Dialing is enabled. ❥ Equal Access (101X + XXX) Dialing is enabled. ❥ Equal Access (1010 + XXX) Dialing is enabled without restriction because the 1010 + XXX Equal Access Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing).
Toll Restriction Programming Basic Setup 1. To set up Toll Restriction Tables prior to programming: 1. In 3501-01: Toll Restriction Country Type (page 839), set the Toll Restriction Country Type. - For systems installed in North America, you should select US Domestic (1). 2. Assign a Toll Restriction level to an extension. 1. In 2102-02: Station Toll Level (Day) (page 724) and 2102-03: Station Toll Level (Night) (page 724), assign a Toll Restriction level to an extension. 3.
Toll Restriction 2. If no, in 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) (page 844) change the table to an allow table with no entries. This blocks all 1010 + XXX dialing. 1 + Long Distance Dialing Restrictions 1. Do you want to allow 1 + NPA or 1 + NXX dialing? 1. If yes, in 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) (page 846) set up the table. Be sure to initialize the table before programming it for the first time.
Toll Restriction Some Common Toll Restriction Examples Note that the following 4 examples can be simultaneously programmed in the same system – just don’t reinitialize the Toll Restriction Tables in examples 2-4. Example 1: Allowing Only Local Calling Allow users to dial only 7-digit and 10-digit local numbers. All 1 + 7 digit, 1 + 10 digit, 0+, and Equal Access dialing is restricted. 1.
Toll Restriction Operation Toll Restriction operation is automatic. DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 357 Features Flash (page 177) When an extension user with Toll Restriction enabled flashes a line, the system enforces Toll Restriction on any digits the user dials from the new dial tone. For example, if an extension user cannot dial 203 926 5400 before they flash, they cannot dial 203 926 5400 after they flash. Forced Line Disconnect (page 182) Forced Line Disconnect does not bypass Toll Restriction.
Transfer Transfer Description Send the outside call you are on to a co-worker. Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active call to any other extension in the system, a Ring Group, UCD Group or voice mail. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination extension. If a transferred outside call is still unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring.
Transfer Interaction Between Call Forwarding, Extension Hunting, and Transfer Recall The following chart shows how the system handles Transfer Recall call routing when both Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting are enabled at the destination extension. Call Forwarding has priority over Extension Hunting. Call Forwarding and Type 1 (Ring No Answer Line) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type • • • Call rings destination for the 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer interval.
Transfer Call Forwarding and Type 2 (Ring No Answer / Busy Line) Extension Hunting and Call Forwarding and Type 3 (Ring No Answer / Busy All) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type Busy/No Answer *32 Ring No Answer • • • • • In DND Call rings the forwarding destination for the 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer interval. If unanswered, it rings the initial transferring destination for the 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer interval and then diverts to Key Ring.
Transfer Call Forwarding and Type 4 (Busy Line) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type Busy/No Answer *32 Ring No Answer • • • • In DND Call rings the forwarding destination for the 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer interval. If unanswered, it rings the initial transferring destination for the 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer interval and then diverts to Key Ring. Immediate *34 • • Call rings the forwarding destination for the 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer interval.
Transfer Programming Transfer Recall 1. Does an unanswered Transfer ring an idle extension or Ring Group long enough before recalling the extension that initially transferred it? 1. If yes, leave 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) at its current setting. 2. If no, adjust 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) as required. 2. Does an unanswered Transfer Camp-On to a busy destination extension long enough before recalling the extension that initially transferred it? 1.
Transfer Hotline Automatic Transfer 1. When transferring, should the user be able to press Hotline (without first pressing TRANSFER) to Transfer the call? 1. In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. 2. If yes, in 1401-13: Hotline Automatic Transfer (page 632) enter Yes. 3. If no, in 1401-13: Hotline Automatic Transfer (page 632) enter No.
Transfer Reverse Voice Over (page 289) While idle, an extension user can use their Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls. Station Message Detail Recording (page 328) The system assigns the SMDR record to the last extension on the call. For example, if extension 306 answers the call, talks for 20 minutes, and then Transfers the call to extension 302, extension 302 “owns” the entire call record as soon as they hang up.
Transfer Operation Using Transfer In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer your call: Do not hang up. 2 Press TRANSFER. 3. Do one of the following. 4. 5. Features 1. a. Dial your co-worker’s extension. • To Transfer your call directly to your co-worker’s mailbox, do this instead: - Press V-MAIL. - Dial their extension number. - Hang up. b. Press a DSS key. c. Dial a Ring Group or UCD Group master number. d. Press a Call Coverage or Hotline key.
Transfer Using Transfer In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer a call to your co-worker’s speakerphone (i.e., use Handsfree Transfer): 1. Do one of the following. a. While on an outside call: • Press TRANSFER. • Dial you co-worker’s extension number. b. Press Hotline key for your co-worker. 2. Listen for two beeps. • If you hear ringing instead of two beeps, you cannot use Handsfree Transfer. 3. Do one of the following. 366 ◆ a.
Unsupervised Conference Unsupervised Conference Description Available. See Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference (page 341) for more.
User Programmable Features User Programmable Features Description Extension users can set up their telephones to meet their own unique requirements. User Programmable Features allow an extension user to dial mnemonics to customize the way certain features work on their telephone. With User Programmable Features, there is no need to rely on a System Administrator or Communications Manager to set up each phone.
User Programmable Features User Programmable Features To program a feature, press # and the feature’s code. For example, to enable incoming Paging, press # and dial V P Y, then SPEAKER to hang up. By default, Call Forwarding Clear All, System Speed Dial, and Time and Date are only available to the attendant. Mnemonic Numeric Operation Access Level Hotline #HL #45 #HL + Press flashing Hotline key + Enter extension for new Hotline partner + HOLD + Program another Hotline key or SPEAKER to exit.
User Programmable Features User Programmable Features To program a feature, press # and the feature’s code. For example, to enable incoming Paging, press # and dial V P Y, then SPEAKER to hang up. By default, Call Forwarding Clear All, System Speed Dial, and Time and Date are only available to the attendant. Feature Mnemonic Numeric Ringing Line Preference #RLP #757 #RLP + Y to enable or N to disable + SPEAKER to exit.
User Programmable Features Programming 1. Assign an extension’s access level. 1. In 2102-04: User Programming Access Level (page 725), assign an extensions access level (1-5). - Access level 5 has the most capability (see the tables above). Access level 1 has the least capability. - By default, extension 300 has its access level fixed at 5. All other extensions have Access Level 3. Features Other Related Features See the Feature heading in the above table.
Voice Mail Voice Mail Description Voice mail ends the frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telephone tag, freeing up the company’s receptionists and secretaries for more production work. The system is fully compatible with IntraMail, UltraMail, and NVM-Series Voice Mail with Automated Attendant Systems. These systems provide telephone users with comprehensive voice mail and Automated Attendant features. Automated Attendant automatically answers the system’s incoming calls.
Voice Mail Personal Answering Machine Emulation Refer to Call Screening (page 453). You may find that Call Screening better meets your requirements. A keyset user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This lets voice mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension’s incoming calls route to the user’s Subscriber Mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the user hears the caller’s incoming message.
Voice Mail Call Forwarding Timers and Voice Mail The following diagram shows how the system handles an outside call transferred to an extension that is forwarded to voice mail. Transferred Outside Call to Forwarded Extension Extension A transfers line to extension B, which is forwarded Busy/No Answer (type 2) to extension C. 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) The line rings extension B for the Transfer Recall time. See Transfer (page 358) for more.
Voice Mail Programming Basic Installation 1. To install IntraMail: 1. Turn the system off. - In DSX-40, the card plugs directly into the equipment cabinet. - In DSX-80/160, the card plugs into the CPU PCB. 3. Normally, you should leave the following at their default settings: - 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (page 624) (500-507). - 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (page 864) (700). - 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name (page 865) (VM PORT #). - 4112-02: Operator’s Extension (page 868) (300) 4.
Voice Mail NVM-Series Station Port Assignments Secondary (1203) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 202 204 206 208 3. In 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863), enter 4 (for external). 4. Normally, you should leave the following at their default settings: - 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (page 624) (500-507). - 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (page 864) (700). - 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name (page 865) (VM PORT #). - 4112-02: Operator’s Extension (page 868) (300) 5.
Voice Mail Automated Attendant Answering 1. To set up the Automated Attendant to answer calls during the day: 1. In 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819), enter 700. 2. To control the day/night mode of lines terminated to voice mail during the day, set up a UCD night key 2. Features on your extension or DSS Console. - To set up a UCD night key on an extension: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 18. - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter 700.
Voice Mail 2. Do unanswered calls ring the overflow destination for the proper interval before diverting to Key Ring? 1. If yes, leave 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) at its current setting. 2. If no, adjust 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) as required. 3. When all voice mail ports are busy, should the caller wait for an idle port or overflow to an alternate destination? 1. To wait for an idle port: - In 2302-01: UCD Group Overflow Destination (page 792), enter None (by pressing CLEAR).
Voice Mail Other Related Features IntraMail Features None DSX Software Manual Features ◆ 379 Features Features Account Codes (page 14) • Voice mail callout features (such as Message Notification) may interact with Account Codes if the callout number contains # characters. Attendant Position (page 24) • STRF transfers to the attendant from the voice mail Automated Attendant flash the Operator Call key and the Ring Indicator lamp. The call does not flash a line/loop key.
Voice Mail Operation The Voice Mail Basics In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To call your mailbox: 1. (Optional) Check the status of your mailbox. • On your display, V-Mail xx [VMxx] is the number of new messages in your mailbox. • In addition, your Ring/Message lamp flashes fast (red) when you have new messages. 2. Press V-MAIL. • V-MAIL is on (red) while you are connected to your mailbox. 3. If requested, enter your Security Code.
Voice Mail Transferring Calls to a Mailbox In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer your active call to a mailbox: Method A (Ring first, then Transfer) Press TRANSFER. 2. Dial the number of the mailbox to receive the Transfer. • You can optionally press the DSS key for your co-worker. • To transfer the call to your own mailbox, dial your extension number. 3. Press V-MAIL and hang up. • Voice mail will prompt your caller to leave a message.
Voice Mail Using Conversation Record In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To record your active call in a mailbox: 1. 2. Do one of the following. a. Press a Record Feature Key on your extension or DSS Console. • The record key can be assigned to yours or a co-worker’s mailbox. • The key will flash fast (green) on your keyset; flash fast (red) on your DSS Console. b. [Record] [Rec] Select to record your conversation.
Voice Mail In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using Answering Machine Emulation To activate or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation: • Refer to Call Screening (page 453). You may find that Call Screening better meets your requirements. 1. Select the Call Forwarding options. [Menu + Call Forward] [Menu + Cfwd] 3. Select or cancel a Personal Answering Machine Emulation. [Ans Machine] [MORE + AME] Select Personal Answering Machine Emulation. • Alternately dial 7.
Voice Mail Setting up a Message Center Key 384 ◆ Feature Mnemonic Operation Access Level Voice Mail #KP (#57) #KP + Press key you want to program + HOLD + Dial 24 + Enter mailbox number + HOLD + CONF + SPEAKER twice to exit.
Voice Over Voice Over Description Get through to a co-worker busy on a handset call — without interrupting their call. Voice Over lets a user get through to a keyset extension user busy on a handset call. With Voice Over, the busy keyset extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting party. The keyset extension user can respond to the interrupting party without being heard by the original caller.
Voice Over Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) An operator cannot receive a Voice Over from a co-worker since their extension is never busy to Intercom callers. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) An extension can Voice Over after calling a co-worker by pressing their Call Coverage key. Conference (page 89) An extension user cannot Voice Over to a co-worker busy on a Conference call.
Voice Over Operation Using Voice Over In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To initiate a Voice Over to a busy extension: Listen for busy/ring tone. • If you don’t hear busy ring, you cannot Voice Over. 2. Do one of the following. a. [Vovr] [Voice Over] b. Dial 9, then speak with your co-worker. Features 1. Press to select Voice Over, then speak with your co-worker. To respond to a Voice Over alert one to your extension: 1. Listen for two beeps while on a call. 2.
Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Description Easily adjust the volume of ringing, Paging, and other features.
Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Programming Volume Settings 1. Should the system remember the volume settings you set for outside calls? 1. If yes, in 2111-07: Retain Line Volume Setting (page 732) enter Yes. Features 2. If no, in 2111-07: Retain Line Volume Setting (page 732) enter No. Display Backlight and Key Pad Illumination Controls 2. Set up the telephone display backlight and key pad illumination controls. 1.
Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Operation Adjusting your Telephone’s Volume In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To interactively adjust the volume while a feature is active: 1 While the feature is active, press Volume Up and Volume Down. • Pressing Volume Up and Volume Down while idle adjusts the telephone’s display contrast. To adjust the display contrast: 1. While your telephone is idle, press Volume Up and Volume Down.
Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Adjusting your Telephone’s Volume In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up the display brightness, contrast control, and dial pad illummination presets: 1. [Menu + Display] [Menu + MORE (2 or 3 times) + Dsply] 2. Do one of the following. Select the display preset mode. [Contrast] [Cont] • • Select the display contrast preset. When you see Contrast ------, press Volume Up and Volume Down to set the contrast preset (0-8).
Walking Class of Service Walking Class of Service Description An extension user can temporarily use their Toll Restriction and Class of Service options at a co-worker’s phone. Walking Class of Service allows an extension user to temporarily implement their Toll Restriction and Class of Service settings at a co-worker’s keyset. This is normally used to override dialing restrictions at a telephone.
Walking Class of Service Other Related Features Operation Using Walking Class of Service In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To enable Walking Class of Service at a co-worker’s extension: 1. Press INTERCOM. 2. Dial ##0. • You see: WALKING COS ENTER EXTENSION: 3. Enter your own extension number + HOLD. • You see: xxx: WALKING COS ENTER PIN CODE: 4. Enter your own PIN number + HOLD.
Walking Class of Service Entering or Changing Your PIN Number 4. In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] When you see NEW PIN ACCEPTED: [Exit] [Exit] To change your PIN number (if you already have one assigned): 1. Press INTERCOM and dial ##6. 2. When you see ENTER PIN CODE: • Enter your current PIN number + HOLD. 3. When you see ENTER NEW PIN: • Enter your new PIN number + HOLD. • When entering your PIN number: - CLEAR erases your entire entry.
IntraMail Features Introduction How To Use This Chapter If you are not familiar with the IntraMail features, review the IntraMail Feature Glossary on page 402. This chapter provides detailed information on the IntraMail features. Similar to the Features chapter, the IntraMail features in this chapter are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary.
Start-Up Programming Start-Up Programming Start-Up IntraMail Programming 1. Enable the mailboxes for all installed extensions (not for Built-In Automated Attendant). 1. Add additional IntraMail mailboxes as required. - In 2141-01: Station Mailbox Type (page 766), enter 1. This enables a Subscriber Mailbox for the extension. - By default in DSX-80/160, the first 16 mailboxes are enabled (extensions 300-315). - By default in DSX-40, the first 8 mailboxes are enabled (extensions 300-307). 2.
Start-Up Programming 6. Review this additional programming (not for Built-In Automated Attendant). 1. Normally, you should leave the following programs at their default settings: - 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (page 624) (500-507). - 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (page 864) (700). - 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name (page 865) (VM PORT #).
Specifications Specifications Specifications Built-In Automated Attendant Capacities Mailboxes Routing Mailboxes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Routing: . . . . . 8 Announcement: . . . 0 Subscriber:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ring Group Mailboxes:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCD Group Mailboxes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 0 0 0 Total: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Examples Application Examples Examples of Some Common Applications The examples below show some common applications. The chart in the beginning of each example shows: ❥ How the relevant programmable options work by default. ❥ The Application Summary, which provides the basic steps you need to take to set up the application. Following the chart are the step-by-step instructions for setting up the application.
Application Examples Example 2: Provide Unique Day and Night Dialing Options for Callers Default Dial Action Table Options (This application does not apply to the Built-In Automated Attendant.) • • All Call Routing Mailboxes (1-8 by default) use Dial Action Table 1. Dial Action Table 1 provides the following dial options: • Dial extension number (300-427). • Dial 0 for extension 300. • Dial * + extension to leave a Quick Message. • Dial # + extension to do a Remote Logon to the mailbox.
Application Examples Example 3: Overflow to IntraMail in the Day, Answer in Night Mode Default Ringing and Overflow Setup • • • • • • Lines 1-12 ring on line keys 1-12 for extensions 300-315. All other extensions are lamp only for lines 1-12. Lines 13-64 do not appear on line keys. Overflow is disabled for all lines. No lines are terminated to voice mail (i.e., voice does not answer any outside lines). There are no System night keys programmed.
IntraMail Feature Glossary IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage Administrator Security Code Control • See Security Code in this glossary. Voice Mail Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox • See Next Call Routing Mailbox in this Glossary. Voice Mail Announcement Mailbox Mailbox that allows a prerecorded greeting to play to callers. • See Announcement Mailbox (page 412) for more.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Automated Attendant Transfer Description Usage While on an outside call, an extension user can transfer their call to the Automated Attendant so the caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options. • See Automated Attendant Transfer (page 441) for more. Voice Mail Automatic Call Routing to a Mailbox • See Go to a Mailbox in this glossary. Automatic Message Erase/Save • See Auto Erase or Save in this glossary.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Conversation Record Description Usage Allows an extension user to record their active call as a message in their mailbox. IntraMail will broadcast a beep and a voice prompt to the callers as Conversation Record begins. • See Conversation Record (page 462) for more. Voice Mail Day, Night, and Holiday Greetings • See Flexible Answering Schedules in this glossary. Deleting a Message • See Message Delete in this glossary.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Usage Flexible Call Routing The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. There are 3 components to Flexible Call Routing. • Answer Table Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each Voice Mail port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Hang Up Automated Attendant Help • See Getting Recorded Help in this glossary. Individual Line Greetings • See Multiple Company Greetings in this glossary. Automated Attendant The Instruction Menu is the announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers. Normally, the Instruction Menu provides callers with the Automated Attendant dialing options. • See Instruction Menu (page 507).
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Mailbox Transfer Main Menu Make Call Master Mailboxes • Usage See Transfer to a Mailbox in this glossary. Voice Mail The IntraMail options available to an extension user when they log onto their mailbox. • See Main Menu (page 523) for more. Voice Mail A Subscriber Mailbox user can listen to a voice message and dial MC to return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number. • See Make Call (page 525) for more.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage IntraMail will save a mailbox’s new or saved messages for the Message Retention interval, and then delete them. • See Message Retention (page 547) for more. Voice Mail • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Message Storage Limit Sets how many messages a mailbox can store. • See Message Storage Limit (page 548) for more.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage • Pre-recorded voice prompts guide the user through the IntraMail features. Voice Mail Recording a Conversation • See Conversation Record in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording a Message • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording Conversation Beep • See Conversation Record in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording Options • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage Single Digit Dialing An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. • See Single Digit Dialing (page 572) for more. Automated Attendant Subscriber Mailbox The mailbox type normally used for telephone system extensions. • See Subscriber Mailbox (page 574) for more.
IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Undefined Routing Undefined Routing Intercept Unscreened Transfer Voice Prompting Messages Volume Control with Voice Mail DSX Software Manual Usage A dialpad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit for which there is no routing assigned, IntraMail plays a brief error message and then repeats the dialing options. • See Undefined Routing (page 586) for more.
Announcement Mailbox Announcement Mailbox Description Play a pre-recorded announcement to callers. An Announcement Mailbox plays a pre-recorded announcement to Automated Attendant callers without providing dialing options. The Announcement Mailbox is typically set up to provide information to callers (such as company directions) and then route back to the Automated Attendant. For example: ❥ The Automated Attendant instructs the caller to dial a digit (e.g., 1) for company directions.
Announcement Mailbox Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing (If the outside caller routes directly to the Announcement Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox 4223-01: Repeat Count 4223-02-Hang Up After Undefined 0 (No repeats) Yes or No Action • • 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) 0 (No repeats) No • • Yes • Undefined x (x number of repeats) Yes or No • • 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) x (x number of repeats) No • • Yes • • DSX Software Manual If the caller doesn’t dial, after
Announcement Mailbox Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Page 1 of 2) (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox 4223-01: Repeat Count 4223-02-Hang Up After Undefined 0 (No repeats) No Action • • Yes • • 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) 0 (No repeats) No • • Yes • • Undefined x (x number of repeats) No • • Yes • • 414 ◆ IntraMail Features If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement the caller go
Announcement Mailbox Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Page 2 of 2) (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox 4223-01: Repeat Count 4223-02-Hang Up After 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) x (x number of repeats) No Action • • Yes • • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Announcement Mailbox Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Automated Attendant (page 433) The Automated Attendant can route callers to an Announcement Mailbox. Call Routing Mailbox (page 450) A Call Routing Mailbox (and the associated Dial Action Table) provides dialing options to Automated Attendant callers. Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 552) The Next Call Routing mailbox provides additional routing options to Announcement Mailbox callers.
Announcement Message Announcement Message Description This is the message that the System Administrator records for an Announcement Mailbox. The Announcement Message is the voice message that the System Administrator records for a specific Announcement Mailbox. See Announcement Mailbox (page 412) for more. Programming See Announcement Mailbox (page 412). Other Related Features IntraMail Features Features None IntraMail Features See Announcement Mailbox (page 412).
Answer Schedule Override Answer Schedule Override Description Enables an alternate greeting and alternate dialing options for callers. Answer Schedule Override provides alternate answering for Automated Attendant calls. When enabled, Answer Schedule Override sends calls to the specified Override Mailbox. The Override Mailbox can be an Announcement, Call Routing, or Subscriber mailbox. You can use Answer Schedule Override to provide holiday and bad weather closing announcements, for example.
Answer Schedule Override The Override Mailbox can be a Subscriber Mailbox. System Administrator (page 576) Optionally enable Answer Schedule Override from the System Administrator Mailbox. Operation Enabling Answer Schedule Override [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox. SA (72) Access System Administrator options. [System Admin] - [N/A] O (6) Access Answer Schedule Override.
Answer Tables Answer Tables Description Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. IntraMail provides 8 Answer Tables. The Answer Table is an integral part of the Automated Attendant.
Answer Tables The Default Mailbox and Routing Hierarchy The Default Mailbox provides routing for an Answer Table during periods when a schedule is not in effect. By default, for example, Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 is active Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM. The Default Mailbox for Answer Table 1 is active during all other times (i.e., evenings and weekends). Since Schedule 1 and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1, initially the routing is the same 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Answer Tables Default Setting • All lines are assigned to Answer Table 1. • All outside lines are set to Key Ring during the day and at night. Programming Basic Setup 1. Assign Answer Tables to outside lines. 1. In 3131-02: IntraMail Answer Table Assignment (page 828), assign an Answer Table (1-8) to each line that the Automated Attendant should answer. 2. Set up the Automated Attendant to answer outside calls during the day. 1. In 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819), enter 700. 2.
Answer Tables Setting Up a Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule 1. Assign the schedule type and routing mailbox. 1. In 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Type (page 882), enter 1. 2. In 4212-[01-10]: Routing Mailbox Number (page 883), select the Routing Mailbox (1-16) that will answer calls when this Schedule Entry is active. - You can optionally assign a Subscriber Mailbox for this option. This will route outside callers directly to a subscriber’s mailbox so they can leave a message. 2. Set the schedule run day and time.
Answer Tables Setting Up a Type 3 (Date) Schedule 1. Assign the schedule type and routing mailbox. 1. In 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Type (page 882), enter 3. 2. In 4212-[01-10]: Routing Mailbox Number (page 883), select the Routing Mailbox (1-16) that will answer calls when this Schedule Entry is active. - You can optionally assign a Subscriber Mailbox for this option. This will route outside callers directly to a subscriber’s mailbox so they can leave a message. 2. Set the schedule run date. 1.
Answering Machine Emulation Answering Machine Emulation Description A keyset on the connected telephone system can work like a home answering machine. A user’s keyset can work like a home answering machine. This lets IntraMail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension’s incoming calls route to the user’s Subscriber Mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the user hears two alert tones followed by the caller’s incoming message.
Answering Machine Emulation In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Using Personal Answering Machine Emulation When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller’s voice: 1. 426 Do one of the following. ◆ a. Do nothing to have the caller’s message automatically recorded in your mailbox. b. Press SPEAKER or lift the handset to intercept the call. • If your extension is in the headset mode, you can only press SPEAKER. c.
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Description Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated Attendant calls directly to an extension user’s mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb, Automated Attendant calls to their extension go directly to their mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant.
Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Operation Recording a Multiple Greeting and Setting Up Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. G (4) Access the Mailbox Greeting options. [Greeting] - [Greet] IntraMail does the following: • Plays a summary of your current settings. • Displays the status of your active Greeting (1-3).
Auto Erase or Save Auto Erase or Save Description When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, IntraMail will either save or erase the message. When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, IntraMail will either automatically save or erase the message. The setting of this option depends on how the subscriber would prefer their mailbox to operate.
Auto Erase or Save Other Related Features N/A Operation N/A 430 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Software Manual
Auto Time Stamp Auto Time Stamp Description Automatically hear the time and date a message was left. After a Subscriber Mailbox user listens to a message, IntraMail can optionally announce the time and date the message was left. The Subscriber can enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox, or you can optionally enable it from system programming. Auto Time Stamp helps if the subscriber needs to know the time and date of each message they receive without taking any extra steps.
Auto Time Stamp Operation Turning Auto Time Stamp On or Off [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. OP (67) Access the Mailbox Options Menu. [MBOX Options] - [N/A] AT (28) Access Auto Time Stamp. [Time Stamp] - [Time] IntraMail plays a summary of your Auto Time Stamp setting. • By default, Auto Time Stamp is turned off. O (6) 432 ◆ Turn Auto Time Stamp on or off. # Go back to the Mailbox Options Menu. 0 Plays Help message.
Automated Attendant Automated Attendant Description Automatically answers the telephone system’s incoming calls, plays an Instruction Menu message, and provides dialing options to callers. For a built-in call answering capability when IntraMail is not installed, see Automated Attendant, Built-In (page 433).
Automated Attendant Upgrading from the Built-In Automated Attendant To upgrade to IntraMail from the Built-In Automated Attendant: 1. Plug the IntraMail CompactFlash card into the system. - See your system’s Hardware Manual for more. 2. Reset the system. IntraMail automatically installs. 3. Rerecord your Instruction Menu Messages. - Your Answer Schedule and Dial Action Table programming remain intact. Conditions • None Default Setting • See Description above. Programming 1.
Automated Attendant 1. See Dial Action Table (page 465) for more. Other Related Features Operation Using the Automated Attendant For the outside caller: 1. After Automated Attendant answers, the voice prompts will instruct you on which digits to dial. DSX Software Manual IntraMail Features ◆ 435 IntraMail Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line.
Automated Attendant, Built-In Automated Attendant, Built-In Description Provides built-in call answering capability when IntraMail is not installed. For the full-featured IntraMail Automated Attendant that automatically answers incoming calls, plays an Instruction Menu message, and provides dialing options to callers, see Automated Attendant (page 433). The Built-In Automated Attendant gives the system call answering and routing capabilities when IntraMail is not installed.
Automated Attendant, Built-In DIL to Voice Mail Master (700) ● 3112-01: Direct Termination (Day) 3112-04: Direct Termination (Night) ● 3131-02: Answer Table ● Automated Attendant Answering (Default) Lines Route to Answer Table 1 Answer Table 1 ● 421x-Answer Table Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox 4212: Schedule ● 4211-01: Default Mailbox ● Call Routing Mailbox 001 ● ● Dial an extension number, or 0 for the operator To record a new Instruction Menu Message (from Extension 300): 422x: Routing Ma
Automated Attendant, Built-In Programming 1. Enable the Built-In Automated Attendant. 1. In 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863), enter 1. 2. (Optional) If you want to upgrade the Built-In Automated Attendant to IntraMail: 2. Plug in the IntraMail CompactFlash Card. Reset the system. All system programming (Answer Tables, Dial Action Tables, etc.) will be retained. Any custom Instruction Menu messages will be unavailable. Should extension be able to record the Instruction Menu message (greeting)? 1.
Automated Attendant, Built-In 8. Set up the Dial Action Tables. 1. See Dial Action Table (page 465) for more. 9. Set the maximum message length for Automated Attendant callers leaving a message in a mailbox. 1. Set the maximum message length in 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (page 872). - This sets the maximum message length (1-4095 seconds) for outside Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a Subscriber Mailboxes.
Automated Attendant, Built-In Operation Using the Built-In Automated Attendant For the outside caller: After Automated Attendant answers, the voice prompts will instruct you on which digits to dial. 1. Recording an Automated Attendant Instruction Menu (Attendant Greeting) Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] #AG (#24) Access the Attendant Greeting options. • Your extension must have access level 5. Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number (001-008).
Automated Attendant Transfer Automated Attendant Transfer Description While on an outside call, an extension user can transfer their call to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. An extension user can transfer their outside call to the Automated Attendant so the outside caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options.
Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers Description Automatically route Automated Attendant callers that don’t dial any digits to a specified option. If an Automated Attendant caller doesn’t dial any digits, IntraMail will automatically route them to a specified option (such as the operator or a mailbox). This lets rotary telephone users stay on the line to leave a message or have their call processed.
Bilingual Voice Prompts Bilingual Voice Prompts Description Provides IntraMail voice prompts in one of two active languages. There are up to six languages stored in the IntraMail CompactFlash card, any two of which you can make active. By default, English mnemonic and English numeric are active and the other four languages (if any) are inactive. You activate an inactive language through system programming. Automated Attendant callers can optionally dial a digit to select the language of their choice.
Bilingual Voice Prompts Routing Mailbox If an outside call is answered by a Routing Mailbox (e.g., when Automated Attendant answers), the caller uses the Routing Mailbox language for the duration of the call. Priority 2 Line When an outside call is answered by voice mail (e.g., when a DIL to an extension hunts to that extension’s mailbox), the caller uses the language programmed for the line for the duration of the call.
Bilingual Voice Prompts 3. Select the prompt language for Call Routing Mailboxes. 1. In 4221-02: Routing Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (page 890), select the prompt language used by calls answered or routed to the Routing Mailbox. The options are: - 1 for Primary Language - 2 for Secondary Language 4. Optionally allow an Automated Attendant caller to dial a digit to switch languages. 1. For the Call Routing Mailbox that will initially answer the call: 5. Select the prompt language for outside lines. 1.
Bilingual Voice Prompts Other Related Features Features Transfer (page 358) Transferred outside calls use the language setting of the line. IntraMail Features Log Onto Voice Mail (page 515) When doing a Remote Logon through the Automated Attendant, the caller uses the destination mailbox language setting (not the language of the Routing Mailbox that answered the call).
Call Forward to a Mailbox Call Forward to a Mailbox Description An extension user can forward their calls to their mailbox. A subscriber can easily forward calls to their Subscriber Mailbox. Instead of dialing an extension as the forwarding destination, the user just presses their V-MAIL key instead. With Call Forward to a Mailbox, the subscriber is assured that their calls don’t get forgotten when they are busy or unavailable.
Call Forward to a Mailbox Conditions • None Default Setting • Call Forwarding is allowed, but not set up for any extensions. • Ring No Answer Call Forward occurs after 10 seconds. Programming 1. Set how long an unanswered call will ring before forwarding. 1. In 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (page 670), program how long an unanswered call will ring before forwarding. - For type 2 (Not Answered) and type 6 (Busy or Not Answered) forwarding, an unanswered call will forward after this interval.
Call Forward to a Mailbox Operation Activating or Canceling Call Forward to your Mailbox In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To activate Call Forwarding: 1. Select the Call Forwarding options. [Menu + Call Forward] [Menu + Cfwd] 2. Alternately do one of the following: • Press INTERCOM and dial *3. • Press your Call Forwarding Feature Key. Select or cancel a Call Forwarding type. Select Call Forwarding Immediate. • Alternately dial 4.
Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox Description The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies the dialing options and announcements for Automated Attendant callers. The Call Routing Mailbox, associated with an Answer Table, specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers. By default, IntraMail provides 8 Call Routing Mailboxes (1-8). However, you can assign any of the 16 Routing Mailboxes as a Call Routing Mailbox.
Call Routing Mailbox Conditions • None Default Setting • See Description above. Programming 1. Set up the Call Routing Mailbox. 1. In 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type (page 890), enter 1. - Select the Routing Mailbox (1-16) you want to program. - By default, Call Routing Mailboxes are 1-8. 2. To record an Instruction Menu message for the Call Routing Mailbox: 3. To assign which Dial Action Table will provide dialing options for this Call routing Mailbox: 1.
Call Routing Mailbox System Administrator (page 576) The System Administrator can record the Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox. See Operation below. Operation Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. SA (72) Access System Administrator options. [System Admin] - [N/A] I (4) Select Instruction Menus. [Instruction] - [Instr] Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number (001-016).
Call Screening Call Screening Description Users can screen (listen to) voice mail messages as they are being left in their mailbox. Call Screening allows a display keyset extension user to listen to (screen) a voice mail message as it is being left in their mailbox. Call Screening emulates a standard home answering machine — in addition to providing more control when handling incoming messages.
Call Screening Operation Manual Call Screening Operation • • In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] When Automatic Call Screening is off, you hear a single beep and V-MAIL flashes fast while IntraMail records your caller’s message. Your display automatically changes to show the Call Screening soft key options. Call Screening is only available while your telephone is idle. To intercept the call (and stop recording the message): 1. [Answer] [Answ] This intercepts the call.
Call Screening In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Automatic Call Screening Operation • • When Automatic Call Screening is on, your idle telephone automatically goes into the screen mode while your caller leaves a message. Call Screening is only available while your telephone is idle. To turn Automatic Call Screening on or off: 1. [Menu + Screen] [Menu + More + More + Scrn] Enable or disable Automatic Call Screening. [On] [On] Turn Automatic Call Screening on.
Caller ID and Voice Mail Caller ID and Voice Mail Description A telephone company service that provides a caller’s number and optional name. Caller ID is a telephone company service that provides an extension with a caller’s number and optional name. With Caller ID, the keyset user knows who’s calling before they pick up the call. Caller ID Logging stores a record of the call on the user’s telephone which they can review and use to easily return the call.
Caller ID and Voice Mail Other Related Features Features Caller ID (page 63) and Caller ID Logging (page 68) Review these features for additional information. IntraMail Features Make Call (page 525) An extension user can listen to a voice message and dial a code to return the call without knowing the caller’s phone number. Make call to an outside telephone number requires Caller ID.
Caller ID with Return Call Caller ID with Return Call Description Available. See Make Call (page 525) for more.
Calling the Automated Attendant Calling the Automated Attendant Description Outside callers can return to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. Programming Turn to Automated Attendant Transfer (page 441) and Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 552). Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Turn to Automated Attendant Transfer (page 441) and Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 552).
Centrex Transfer Centrex Transfer Description The Automated Attendant can transfer a caller from a Centrex line to an outside number using the features of that Centrex line. Centrex Transfer is a Dial Action Table option that can transfer an Automated Attendant call from a Centrex line to an outside number using the features of that Centrex line.
Centrex Transfer 3. Set the Flash and pause timers for compatibility with the connected Centrex lines. 1. Set the Flash timer for compatibility with the connected Centrex lines. - In 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (page 686), set the timer for compatibility with the connected Centrex service. 2. Set the Pause timer for compatibility with the Centrex Transfer feature. - In 1602-04: Dial Pause Timer (page 673), set the timer for compatibility with the connected Centrex service. 4.
Conversation Record Conversation Record Description Allows an extension user to record their active call as a message in their mailbox. Conversation Record allows a subscriber to record their active call as a new message in their mailbox, which they can review later on. Conversation Record can be helpful when an extension user is on a call that involves a lot of detail (such as a technical discussion or extensive directions).
Conversation Record 3. Enable the Conversation Record Beep and Warning. 1. In 2143-05: Recording Conversation Beep (page 771), enter Yes. - If enabled, all parties on a call being recorded will hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep will not occur. - Disabling this option may be interpreted as an invasion of privacy. 4. Set the maximum length of recorded conversations. 1.
Conversation Record User Programmable Feature Setting up a Conversation Record Key 464 ◆ Feature Mnemonic Operation Access Level Voice Mail #KP (#57) #KP + Press key you want to program + HOLD + Dial 17 + Enter mailbox number or 0 for your own mailbox + HOLD + SPEAKER twice to exit.
Dial Action Table Dial Action Table Description Defines the dialing options for Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table Dial Action Table Options The following table summarizes the Dial Action Table dial (key) actions and their associated features. Dial Action Table Key Action Summary Action Description Feature Reference For more, see: STRF Screened Transfer (1) Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an extension. IntraMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the call can go through.
Dial Action Table Programming 1. Assign a Dial Action Table to each active Call Routing Mailbox. 1. In 4222-01: Dial Action Table (page 891), assign a Dial Action Table (1-16) to each active Call Routing Mailbox. 2. Customize the Dial Action Table options. 1. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), customize the Dial Action Table digit assignments as required. The following table shows the Dial Action Table default assignments.
Dial Action Table 4. To change the amount of time Automated Attendant callers have to dial options: 1. See Automated Attendant (page 433) for more. 2. In 4222-02: Time Limit for Dialing Commands (page 891), enter the timeout duration (0-99 seconds). - By default, Automated Attendant callers have 5 seconds to dial commands. 3. If the caller waits too long to dial: - When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed, the caller routes to that destination.
Directory Dialing Directory Dialing Description An Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name. 5. Voice prompts announce the first three matches, and allow the caller to dial a digit (1-3) to reach one of the announced matches. Additionally, the caller can dial 4 to hear additional matches (if any). 6. The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach, and IntraMail sends the call to that exten- sion.
Directory Dialing 3. To record a Directory Dialing Message: 1. See Operation below. - The Directory Dialing Message is the Instruction Menu for the Routing Mailbox programmed as a Directory Dialing Mailbox. - By default (without a custom message recorded), the Directory Dialing Message is, “Please enter one or more letters of the person’s name, then press the pound key.” 2. Check 4201-01: Outgoing Message Length (page 871).
Directory Dialing Additional Options 1. Should Directory Dialing Mailbox be able to detect and route incoming faxes? 1. In yes: - In 4224-08: Fax Detection (page 899), enter Yes. - This allows the Directory Dialing Mailbox to detect fax CNG tone. - In 4224-09: Fax Transfer Extension (page 900), enter the extension to which the Directory Dialing Mailbox should route the fax. - When the Directory Dialing Mailbox detects fax CNG tone, it routes the call to this extension. 2.
Directory Dialing Operation Recording a Directory Dialing Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. SA (72) Access System Administrator options. [System Admin] - [N/A] I (4) Select Instruction Menus. [Instruction] - [Instr] Enter the Directory Dialing Mailbox number. L (5) Listen to the current Directory Dialing Message (if any). [Listen] - [Lstn] # R (7) Exit listen mode. Record a new Directory Dialing Message. [Record] - [Rec] Record message.
Directory Dialing Dialing Options Available while Entering a Name The following table shows the dialing options available to the caller while they are entering a name into a Directory Dialing Mailbox. ❥ By default, the caller can dial the digs 2-9 to enter the name or dial # to return to the Automated Attendant.
Directory Dialing Dialing Options Available when more than one Employee has the Entered Name If the name the caller enters is used by more than one employee, IntraMail lets the caller select the employee to which they want to talk. The caller can dial 1, 2 or 3 to select the employee from the first three name matches, or dial 4 to hear additional name matches. ❥ By default, the caller can also dial * to make a new entry or dial # to return to the Automated Attendant.
Directory Dialing Mailbox Directory Dialing Mailbox Description The mailbox type required for Directory Dialing. A Directory Dialing Mailbox is the Routing Mailbox type required to implement Directory Dialing. See Directory Dialing (page 469) for more on how to set up a Directory Dialing Mailbox. Conditions • None Default Setting • No Directory Dialing Mailboxes assigned. Programming Set up the Directory Dialing Mailbox. 1.
Erasing All Messages Erasing All Messages Description Lets the System Administrator delete mailbox messages system-wide. The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber Mailbox. Erasing All Messages is an administrator’s maintenance tool. The administrator may need to use this tool if an employee has left the company or has an excessive number of messages stored in their mailbox.
Exiting a Mailbox Exiting a Mailbox Description Exit your mailbox by dialing a code or by hanging up. A Subscriber Mailbox user can exit their mailbox by dialing a code or by hanging up. After exiting, the subscriber can use their extension for normal call processing. Conditions • None Default Setting • Enabled Programming N/A IntraMail Features Other Related Features N/A Operation Exiting a Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] To exit your mailbox: Log onto Subscriber Mailbox.
Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Description Automatically sends unanswered calls to an extension’s mailbox. Extension Hunting to Voice Mail automatically sends calls to an extension’s mailbox without the user having to set up Call Forwarding. For example, Extension Hunting to Voice Mail can send unanswered transferred calls to an extension’s mailbox rather than recalling the transferring party.
Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Routing Charts The following charts show in detail how each type of hunting handles incoming calls. Ring No Answer Line (Type 1) Hunting to Voice Mail Routing Chart Call Type Extension Idle Ringing Intercom Call Transferred Outside Call UTRF from Automated Attendant STRF from Automated Attendant1 Direct Inward Line Extension in DND Does not hunt (use Call Forwarding instead).
Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Ring No Answer / Busy All (Type 3) Hunting to Voice Mail Routing Chart Call Type Extension Idle Intercom Ringing Intercom call rings for 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (page 670) interval then routes to mailbox. Voiceannounced Intercom calls do not hunt. Transferred Outside Call Rings for 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) interval, then routes to mailbox. UTRF from Automated Attendant 1 Extension Busy Extension in DND Call goes immediately to mailbox.
Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Programming 1. Set up the hunt type and destination for Type 1 hunting. 1. In 2115-01: Hunt Type (page 746), enter: - 1 for Ring No Answer Line. - 2 for Ring No Answer/Busy Line. - 3 for Ring No Answer/Busy All. - 4 for Busy Line. - Refer to Extension Hunting (page 154) for more. 2. In 2115-01: Hunt Destination (page 746), enter 700 (the IntraMail master number). 2. Set the system timers used for Type 1 hunting.
Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 447) A subscriber can forward calls to their mailbox calls don’t go unanswered when they are unavailable. Voice Mail Overflow (page 590) The telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the IntraMail Automated Attendant. Operation Extension Hunting to Voice Mail To force Extension Hunting to Voice Mail to redirect all your calls to your mailbox: 1.
External Transfer External Transfer Description An Automated Attendant caller can automatically route to an outside telephone number. External Transfer allows an Automated Attendant caller to automatically route to an outside telephone number. To set this up, assign a Dial Action Table action as a UTRF to a System Speed Dial bin (e.g., #201 + Pause for system bin 201).
External Transfer Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Centrex Transfer (page 460) Centrex Transfer allows the Automated Attendant to transfer a caller over a Centrex line using the features of that Centrex line. Dial Action Table (page 465) External Transfer uses the active Dial Action Table to route an Automated Attendant caller to an outside telephone number. Operation Operation is automatic once set up in programming.
Fax Detection Fax Detection Description Automatically transfer incoming fax calls to a fax machine. The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls and transfer them to a fax machine. With Fax Detection enabled, after the Automated Attendant answers a call it listens for incoming fax CNG tone. If it detects the tone, it does an unscreened transfer of the call to the specified company fax machine. The incoming fax then prints out on the company fax machine.
Flexible Answering Schedules Flexible Answering Schedules Description The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week. The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week. For example, a company can set up separate schedules for weekdays, evenings, weekends, and specific holidays.
Flexible Call Routing Flexible Call Routing Description Provides outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. You can customize the announcements and routing options to exactly meet the site requirements. Use Flexible Call Routing to eliminate or minimize the need for an operator or receptionist to handle outside calls.
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan Description If telephone extension numbers are customized, set up IntraMail mailbox numbers to match. If the telephone system extension numbers are changed or swapped, IntraMail will automatically change the Subscriber Mailbox numbers to match. There is no extensive reprogramming required. After the swap, all of the subscriber’s messages and options are available at their new extension number.
Forced Unscreened Transfer Forced Unscreened Transfer Description Automatically converts Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers. Programming 1. To enable Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox: 1. In 2144-02: Forced Unscreened Transfer (page 772), enter Yes.
Getting Recorded Help Getting Recorded Help Description Request help from the IntraMail voice prompts. If a Subscriber Mailbox user dials an incorrect code or forgets what to dial while in their mailbox, they can request help from the IntraMail voice prompts. Recorded Help provides the user with a built-in, interactive user’s guide. To get recorded help, the user dials 0. Conditions • None Default Setting • Enabled Programming No additional programming required.
Go to a Mailbox Go to a Mailbox Description An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit and route directly into a mailbox. An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit to route to a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox. This is called the Go To (GOTO) action. The GOTO action can route directly to a specific Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox, or allow the Automated Attendant caller to go to a mailbox of their own choosing. Use the GOTO action to set up a “tree” of Automated Attendant options.
Go to a Mailbox Programming 1. Assign a GOTO action to the active Dial Action Table. 1. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), assign a GOTO action to an available key. 2. To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox: 1. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Routing option. - For example, to have key 1 go to Call Routing Mailbox 1, for key 1 enter GOTO for the Action and 1 for the corresponding Routing.
Greeting Greeting Description A user can record a Greeting for their mailbox callers to hear. A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for their mailbox. Caller’s to the user’s mailbox hear the prerecorded personalized greeting rather than a default message. The greeting can announce the subscriber’s name, provide a personal message (such as “Hello - I am on vacation this week”), or instruct the caller how to leave a message or use other mailbox options.
Greeting Programming 1. Set the maximum length of Subscriber Mailbox greetings. 1. In 4201-01: Outgoing Message Length (page 871), set the maximum length of Subscriber Mailbox greetings (1-4095 seconds). Enabling Remote Greeting 1. Program a LOGON action in the active Dial Action Table. 1. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), assign a LOGON action to an available key. 2. To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox: 1.
Greeting Other Related Features DSX Software Manual IntraMail Features ◆ 495 IntraMail Features Features None IntraMail Features Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 427) Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated Attendant calls directly to a subscriber’s mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant. Dial Action Table (page 465) The active Dial Action Table must have a LOGON action assigned to a key to enable Remote Greeting.
Greeting Operation Recording a Multiple Greeting and Setting Up Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. G (4) Access the Mailbox Greeting options. [Greeting] - [Greet] IntraMail does the following: • Plays a summary of your current settings. • Displays the status of your active Greeting (1-3). [GREETING n: RECORDED] - [GREETING n: RECORDED], or [GREETING n: NOT REC] - [GREETING n: NOT REC] • Shows the Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb status.
Group Mailbox Group Mailbox Description Subscribers in the same group can share a mailbox. Ring Group Mailbox Group (Shared) Mailbox A Group Mailbox is a Ring Group Mailbox shared by a group of co-workers. It is normally a Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller leaves a message at any extension within the group that shares the mailbox, the system stores the message in the shared Group Mailbox.
Group Mailbox If the Group Mailbox user presses V-MAIL, they are asked to enter their mailbox number. After entering the number, they hear, “That mailbox does not exist.” ❥ An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a Remote Logon at an extension assigned to the Group mailbox hears, “That mailbox does not exist.” They then return to the Automated Attendant.
Group Mailbox Programming Programming a Ring Group Mailbox 1. Assign each extension you want to have in the Ring Group. 1. In 2113-02: Ring Group (page 738), assign the extension to a Ring Group (1-8). - The Ring Group assignment determines which Ring Group Mailbox the system uses as the extension’s Group Mailbox.
Group Mailbox - In 2213-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages (page 784), set the auto save option for new messages (1 for Auto Save or 2 for Auto Erase). - Review Auto Erase or Save (page 429) for more. 3. For Auto Time Stamp: - In 2213-03: Auto Time Stamp (page 785), enable (Yes) or disable (No) Auto Time Stamp for the Group Mailbox. - Review Auto Time Stamp (page 431) for more. 4.
Group Mailbox Programming a UCD Group Mailbox 1. Set up the UCD Group. 1. Turn to Extension Hunting (page 154) for more on setting up UCD Hunting. 2. For the UCD Group Mailbox that corresponds to the UCD Group master number, assign the mailbox type. 1. For a Subscriber Mailbox: - In 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type (page 793), enter 1 and go to step 3. 2. For a Routing Mailbox: - In 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type (page 793), enter 2.
Group Mailbox - Review Message Storage Limit (page 548) for more. 10. For Message Waiting Lamp: - In 2313-04: Message Waiting Lamp (page 797), enable (Yes) Message Waiting lamping at the extensions sharing the Group Mailbox. - Review Message Waiting Lamp (page 549) for more. 11. For Next Call Routing Mailbox: - In 2314-03: Dialing Option (page 798), enable (Yes) or disable (No) additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls.
Guest Mailbox Guest Mailbox Description An outside party can have their own mailbox for receiving and sending messages. An outside party can have their own Guest Mailbox mailbox for receiving and sending messages. A Guest Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox that does not have an extension associated with it. A Guest Mailbox has many of the IntraMail features of a Subscriber Mailbox.
Guest Mailbox • A Subscriber Mailbox user cannot use Make Call to return a call left by a Guest Mailbox, since the Guest Mailbox does not have an associated extension. Main Menu (page 523) The Main Menu provides assess to the features available to a Guest Mailbox. Message Listen Mode (page 534) Set the type of messages a guest will listen to when they dial L (5) after logging into their Guest Mailbox.
Guest Mailbox Operation Accessing a Guest Mailbox To log onto a Guest Mailbox: 1. 2. Do one of the following. a. Press INTERCOM + Dial the IntraMail master number (e.g., 700) + Dial your mailbox number. • You can optionally press a Call Coverage key assigned to the IntraMail master number. b. Press the Message Center key for the Guest Mailbox. When IntraMail answers, dial the Guest Mailbox number. 1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial # + Dial the Guest Mailbox number.
Hang Up Hang Up Description An Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. Hang Up is an Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. When setting up a Dial Action Table, you may want to use Hang Up for unused actions (rather than the caller hearing the standard error message). You might also want to use the Hang Up action as the Timeout destination for callers that wait too long to dial after the Automated Attendant answers.
Instruction Menu Instruction Menu Description Play an announcement to outside callers announcing the Automated Attendant dialing options. Programming N/A Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Automated Attendant (page 433) The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls, and assigns the Call Routing Mailbox to the call.
Instruction Menu Operation Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. SA (72) Access System Administrator options. [System Admin] - [N/A] I (4) Select Instruction Menus. [Instruction] - [Instr] Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number. L (5) Listen to the current Instruction Menu (if any). [Listen] - [Lstn] # R (7) Exit listen mode. Record a new Instruction Menu. [Record] - [Rec] Record message.
Leaving a Message Leaving a Message Description Leave a voice message in a mailbox from inside or outside the company. An extension user or outside caller can leave a voice message in a co-worker’s mailbox if that extension is busy, unanswered, or in Do Not Disturb. Leaving a voice message is a handy and efficient way to communicate with co-workers that avoids post-it notes, message pads, and unnecessary email.
Leaving a Message Programming 1. Set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox. 1. In 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (page 872), enter the maximum length of a message a caller can leave in a Subscriber Mailbox (1-4095 seconds).
Leaving a Message Operation Leaving a Message for a Co-worker To leave a message in the mailbox of an unanswered extension: 1. Press V-MAIL. 2. Do one of the following. a. Leave message and hang up. b. Leave message and dial #. • Dialing # sends the message and hangs up. IntraMail Features To leave a message in a mailbox from outside the company: 1. Do one of the following. a. Leave message and hang up. b. Leave message and dial #. • Dialing # may provide you with additional dialing options.
Listening to Messages Listening to Messages Description While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many message handling options from which to choose. While or after listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user has many message handling options from which to choose. The listening options let you quickly and efficiently manage your voice mail messages, respond to the message sender, or forward the message to a co-worker for additional handling.
Listening to Messages Handling Partially Reviewed Messages When listening to multiple new messages when Auto Erase or Save is set to Save: ❥ Any message to which you partially listen is automatically saved. ❥ Any message to which you hang up during or do not listen is retained as a new message. For example, if you have three new messages, listen to part of message 1, dial L to hear part of message 2 and then hang up, IntraMail automatically: ❥ Saves message 1. ❥ Retains messages 2 and 3 as new messages.
Listening to Messages 22-Button and 34-Button Display Currently selected Message List Caller’s phone number (requires Caller ID) Message number (in selected Message List) Time message was left Date message was left Conditions • None Default Setting • Enabled Programming 1. Set the Message Backup/Go Ahead Time. 1. In 4201-03: Message Backup/Go Ahead Time (page 872), set the Backup/Go Ahead Time (1-60 seconds).
Log Onto Voice Mail Log Onto Voice Mail Description An extension user can press a key to log onto (access) their IntraMail mailbox. A subscriber can log onto their mailbox using a method that best suits their needs and location. While at their own phone, the subscriber just presses a single key to log onto their mailbox.
Log Onto Voice Mail Programming Remotely Logging Onto a Mailbox Through the Automated Attendant 1. Program a LOGON action in the active Dial Action Table. 1. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), assign a LOGON action to an available key. 2. To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox: 1. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Routing option.
Log Onto Voice Mail Guest Mailbox (page 503) A guest can log onto their mailbox by dialing the IntraMail master number followed by the Guest Mailbox number. Security Code (page 570) To avoid unauthorized access to their mailbox (particularly with Remote Log On), the user should enable their own unique Security Code.
Mailbox Name Mailbox Name Description A mailbox caller can hear the extension user’s prerecorded name instead of their mailbox number. A caller leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox can hear the mailbox’s prerecorded name instead of the mailbox number. The prerecorded Mailbox Name gives the subscriber’s mailbox that personal touch. Prior to leaving a message, caller’s will hear the name instead of the default “extension xxx” prompt. The recorded name can be up to 10 seconds long.
Mailbox Name Recording Your Mailbox Name [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] # Go back to the Mailbox Main Menu. 0 Plays Help message. [Exit] - [Exit] Recording or Erasing Co-worker’s Names from a System Administrator’s Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox. SA (72) Access System Administrator options. [System Admin] - [N/A] S (7) Select Subscriber Mailbox Maintenance options.
Mailbox Options Menu Mailbox Options Menu Description A Subscriber Mailbox sub-menu that provides access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message Notification features. The Mailbox Options Menu is a sub-menu of a subscriber’s Main Menu that provides access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message Notification features. The chart below summarizes these options.
Mailbox Options Menu Operation Accessing the Mailbox Options Menu [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. OP (67) Access the Mailbox Options Menu. [MBOX Options] - [N/A] 0 Plays Help message.
Mailbox Security Code Delete Mailbox Security Code Delete Description Allows the System Administrator to delete the security code for any mailbox. The System Administrator can delete the security code for any Subscriber Mailbox. This effectively unlocks the mailbox. If mailbox security is not necessary, deleting a mailbox’s security code speeds up mailbox logon. Without a security code, the subscriber just presses their V-MAIL key to immediately log onto their mailbox.
Main Menu Main Menu Description Provides options to an extension user when they log onto their mailbox. After a Subscriber Mailbox user logs into their mailbox, IntraMail provides them with the Main Menu of options. The Main Menu provides quick access to the most commonly used mailbox features in a central location. It includes listening and recording options, as well as additional selections for recording mailbox names and greetings. The chart below summarizes these options.
Main Menu Programming No additional programming required. Other Related Features See the Mailbox Main Menu chart above. Operation Accessing the Mailbox Main Menu [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. • You automatically go to the mailbox Main Menu. 0 524 ◆ Plays Help message which summarizes the Main Menu options. • See the Mailbox Main Menu (page 523) chart for the Main Menu options.
Make Call Make Call Description A Subscriber Mailbox user can dial MC to return a call without knowing their caller’s number. Make Call lets a Subscriber Mailbox user listen to a voice message and dial MC to return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number. Make Call automates returning messages since you don’t have to dial the message sender’s telephone number. Make Call is always available for messages received from co-workers.
Make Call 5. To enable Make Call for remote logons (i.e., subscriber’s logging onto their mailbox through the Automated Attendant): 1. In 3103-04: Tandem Calls (page 816), enter Yes to enable Tandem Calls. - Enable this option for either the inbound or outbound lines (or both).
Master Mailbox Master Mailbox Description See Group Mailbox (page 497).
Message Count Display Message Count Display Description The telephone display can show the number of new messages waiting in a user’s mailbox. The telephone display provides interactive status updates for the subscriber’s mailbox. The subscriber doesn’t have to call their mailbox and wait for the voice prompts to find out the number of new and saved messages in their mailbox. Then can just look at the display instead.
Message Count Display While Logged-in One new message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox One saved message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox IntraMail Features Conditions • None Default Setting • Enabled Programming No additional programming required. Other Related Features N/A Operation Operation is automatic.
Message Delete Message Delete Description An extension user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. A Subscriber Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. Message Delete lets the subscriber do their own mailbox maintenance. They can delete messages they no longer need and save messages that contain essential information. With Message Delete, the subscriber doesn’t have to rely on the System Administrator to perform these routine mailbox maintenance functions.
Message Forward Message Forward Description A subscriber can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker. A Subscriber Mailbox user can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker. Forwarding is helpful when a subscriber receives a message with which a co-worker can assist them. Rather than sending a new message, the subscriber can just forward the message with which they need help. They can also optionally record a comment before the forwarded message.
Message Forward Operation Forwarding a Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. L (5) Access the Message Listen mode and listen to the message that you want to forward. [Listen] - [Lstn] MF (63) Access the Message Forward Menu. [Forward] - [N/A] Enter the number of the mailbox to which you want to forward the message. # Continue. [Continue] - [Cont] Do one of the following. a. Record a comment that will precede the forwarded message + Dial #. b.
Message Length Message Length Description Through system programming, set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a user’s voice mailbox. Programming 1. Set the maximum length of recorded messages. 1. In 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (page 872), set the maximum length (1-4095 seconds) of recorded messages.
Message Listen Mode Message Listen Mode Description When a user calls their mailbox, they can dial a code to listen to all their messages, their new messages, or their saved messages. After logging onto their mailbox, the subscriber can select the category of messages to which they want to listen. Then can listen to just new messages, just saved messages, or all messages.
Message Notification Message Notification Description Dials a telephone number to let the recipient know there are new messages in their mailbox. To protect your mailbox from unauthorized access, be sure to record a security code for your mailbox before enabling Message Notification. How Message Notification Works to Normal Telephone Numbers 1. The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox (see Operation below). 2.
Message Notification - If the pager service doesn’t answer, IntraMail will retry the callout number. Message Notification may eventually cancel if the callout remains unacknowledged. Conditions • None Default Setting • Disabled Programming Programming that Applies to All Types of Message Notification 1. Assign the Line Group the system uses for Message Notification callouts. 1. In 4112-01: Outgoing Dial 9 Group (page 868), select the Line Group (90-98) Message Notification will use for callouts.
Message Notification Unique Programming for Non-pager Message Notification 1. Set the intervals IntraMail will wait between incomplete non-pager notification callouts. 1. In 4202-01: Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (page 873), set the minimum time (1-255 min- 2. Set how IntraMail determines when a non-pager callout rings without being answered. 1. Set the 4202-05: Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts (page 875) interval (1-99 rings).
Message Notification Unique Programming for Digital Pager Message Notification 1. Set up the system-wide options that apply to the digital pager callback number. 1. In 4202-08: Digital Pager Callback Number (page 877), set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. - This is the portion of the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number.
Message Notification Operation Setting Up Message Notification (Page 1 of 2) [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. OP (67) Access the Mailbox Options menu. [Mbox Options] - [N/A] N (6) Access the Message Notification Options Menu. [Notification] - [Notif] IntraMail plays a summary of your Message Notification settings. • The your telephone display shows your current notification settings (see sample below).
Message Notification Setting Up Message Notification (Page 2 of 2) [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] D (3) The notification destination is a digital pager. * Skip this option without changing your entry. # Back up to the previous level without changing your entry. [Pager] - [Pager] [Next] - [Next] [Exit] - [Exit] When you see: Number Enter the Message Notification callout number (16 digits max).
Message On Hold Message On Hold Description A prerecorded message can play to callers while they wait on Hold Message On Hold allows the System Administrator to record a message that will play to callers while they wait on Hold. For example, you can record a message summarizing available services or hours of operation. This message will play to callers as soon as you put them on Hold, and continually repeat as long as they remain on Hold.
Message On Hold Operation Recording the Message On Hold [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. SA (72) Access System Administrator options. [System Admin] - [N/A] 1 Select Message On Hold. [Message On Hold] - [N/A] L (5) Listen to the current Message On Hold (if any). [Listen] - [Lstn] # R (7) Exit listen mode. Record a new Message On Hold. [Record] - [Rec] Record message. * E (3) # E (3) # 0 542 ◆ Pause or restart recording.
Message Playback Direction Message Playback Direction Description An extension user can listen to their messages in either LIFO (last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-infirst-out) order. Programming 1. Set the Message Playback Direction for a Subscriber Mailbox. 1. In 2143-01: Message Playback Order (page 769), set the playback direction. The options are: - 1 for LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest messages first). - 2 for FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest messages first).
Message Record Message Record Description See Record and Send a Message (page 562) for more.
Message Reply Message Reply Description An extension user can reply to a message in their mailbox by dialing a simple code, without knowing the caller’s extension number. A Subscriber Mailbox user can reply to a message from a co-worker by dialing RE, without knowing the caller’s extension or mailbox number. Message Reply saves the subscriber valuable time since they don’t need to know the sender’s extension number or send a separate message to respond.
Message Reply Operation Message Reply [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. L (5) Listen to your messages. [Listen] - [Lstn] While listening to a message. RE (73) Reply to the message. [Reply] - [N/A] • If the mailbox does not exist, you will be prompted to enter the mailbox number to receive the reply. This can occur if you dial RE while listening to a message from an outside caller. # Start recording. [Continue] - [Cont] Options available while recording.
Message Retention Message Retention Description Automatically deletes a mailbox’s messages after a preset time. IntraMail will save a Subscriber Mailbox’s new or saved messages for the Message Retention interval and then delete them. You’ll find Message Retention to be an invaluable tool for managing IntraMail’s voice message storage space. If subscribers are letting old, unwanted messages build up in their mailboxes, shorten the Message Retention time.
Message Storage Limit Message Storage Limit Description Sets how many messages a mailbox can store. Message Storage Limit sets how many messages can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox. Message Storage Limit is another invaluable tool for managing IntraMail’s voice message storage space. To conserve storage space and make it available for new messages, decrease the Message Storage Limit. If storage space is not an issue, increase the Message Storage Limit so subscribers can store additional messages.
Message Waiting Lamp Message Waiting Lamp Description The Ring/Message Lamp flashes when the user has new messages waiting in their mailbox. An extension’s Ring/Message Lamp flashes on the telephone to indicate that the user has new messages waiting in their mailbox. Once IntraMail is properly installed and programmed, telephone Ring/Message Lamp operation is automatic.
Multiple Company Greetings Multiple Company Greetings Description By assigning a unique Answer Table to each line, a single IntraMail system can provide individual greetings and dialing options for several companies. The Automated Attendant can answer each individual line with a unique greeting and unique set of dialing options. Since there are a total of 8 Answer Tables, this allows up to 8 companies or departments to share a single IntraMail.
Multiple Company Greetings Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Automated Attendant (page 433) The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Next Call Routing Mailbox Next Call Routing Mailbox Description Provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in an extension’s mailbox (depending on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode). The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. It also provides additional dialing options to callers routed to an Announcement Mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox Logging Onto a Subscriber Mailbox while Listening to the Greeting A subscriber who wishes to log onto their mailbox while listening to their greeting must have the option set in their Next Call Routing Mailbox. To allow this capability, for example: ❥ Program the Next Call Routing Mailbox # digit as LOGON to IXXX. ❥ While listening to their greeting, the subscriber can dial: # (to route to their Next Call Routing Mailbox), then # and their mailbox number to log onto their mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox Announcement Mailbox Options The following charts show how an Announcement Mailbox handles Automated Attendant calls. ■ The first chart explains what happens when the outside call is directly answered by the Announcement Mailbox. This happens when the Answer Table uses an Announcement Mailbox for routing instead of a Call Routing Mailbox. ■ The second chart explains what happens when the outside call is answered by a Call Routing Mailbox and then routed to the Announcement Mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Page 1 of 2) (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox 4223-01: Repeat Count 4223-02: Hang Up After Undefined 0 (No repeats) No Action • • Yes • • 0 (No repeats) No • • Yes • • Undefined x (x number of repeats) No • • Yes • • DSX Software Manual If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement IntraMail hangs up.
Next Call Routing Mailbox Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Page 2 of 2) (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox 4223-01: Repeat Count 4223-02: Hang Up After 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) x (x number of repeats) No Action • • Yes • • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox Programming Programming Subscriber Mailboxes 1. Optionally assign the Next Call Routing Mailbox to a Subscriber Mailbox. 1. In 2144-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 774), specify the Routing Mailbox (1-16) that should pro- vide the caller leaving a message with additional dialing options. 2. Optionally allow the caller to dial additional digits (not just 0) once in the Next Call Routing Mailbox. 1. In 2144-03: Dialing Option (page 772), enter Yes.
Programming Voice Mail Programming Voice Mail Description Customize IntraMail using the embedded telephone programming or the separately available System Administrator PC program. You program (customize) IntraMail by using the DSX telephone programming or the WindowsTM-based DSX System Administrator PC Program running on a PC or laptop. You can also do limited programming from the System Administrator’s mailbox.
Programming Voice Mail Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Remote Programming (page 564) IntraMail programming is available remotely via the System Administrator PC program. System Administrator (page 576) The System Administrator can do limited IntraMail programming, such as recording Automated Attendant announcements, recording mailbox names, and deleting messages from mailboxes. Operation See Description above.
Quick Message Quick Message Description Automated Attendant callers can dial a digit followed by an extension number to leave a message directly in a user’s mailbox. Quick Message is a Dial Action Table action that allows Automated Attendant callers to dial a digit (normally *) followed by a mailbox number to leave a message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Since Quick Message is enabled by default, it is an efficient way for experienced Automated Attendant callers to leave messages.
Quick Message 3. Set the maximum message length for callers leaving a Quick Message in a mailbox. 1. In 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (page 872), set the maximum length (1-1045 seconds) for Auto- mated Attendant callers leaving a Quick Message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Other Related Features Operation Leaving a Quick Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] To leave a Quick Message after the Automated Attendant answers: 1. Dial *. 2. Dial the Subscriber Mailbox number. 3.
Record and Send a Message Record and Send a Message Description A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber Mailbox. A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber Mailbox. Record and Send a Message is the heart of IntraMail’s voice messaging system. It allows co-workers to efficiently stay in touch and exchange essential information without relying on message slips, memos, or email.
Record and Send a Message Operation Record and Send a Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. RS (77) Record and send a message. [Record] - [Rec] Enter the number of the mailbox to receive the message. # Continue. [Continue] - [Cont] Options available while recording. E (3) # * [Exit] # Pause or restart recording. [Resume] - [Resume] [Pause] - [Pause] IntraMail Features * Erase recording. [Cancel] - [Cancel] End the recording.
Remote Programming Remote Programming Description IntraMail programming is available remotely via the System Administrator PC program. You can remotely program IntraMail by using the WindowsTM-based DSX System Administrator PC Program running on a PC or laptop. After the initial installation, Remote Programming allows you to customize IntraMail to meet the customer’s requirements without being on-site. See the DSX PC Program User Guide for more.
Remote Programming Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Programming Voice Mail (page 558) Customize IntraMail using the embedded telephone programming or the separately available System Administrator PC program. Operation See the DSX PC Program User Guide.
Routing Mailbox Routing Mailbox Description A category of mailboxes used to route Automated Attendant calls Routing Mailboxes are a category of mailboxes normally used to route Automated Attendant calls. A Routing Mailbox can be an Announcement Mailbox, a Call Routing Mailbox, or a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
Screened Transfer Screened Transfer Description Similar to telephone system screened transfers in which the transferring party controls the transfer. Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer Both Screened and Unscreened Transfer allow Automated Attendant callers to directly dial system extensions. The following summarizes the differences between these two types of Automated Attendant transfer.
Screened Transfer Screened Transfer (STRF) Operation • • Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant. Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller. If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off (see page 427 for more on this feature): Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND With Active Greeting Recorded 1. Places a screened (Intercom) call to extension. -If answered, transfers call. 2.
Screened Transfer Programming 1. Assign the STRF action to a key on the active Dial Action Table. 1. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), enter 1 to assign an available key for Screened Transfer (STRF). 2. Normally, the corresponding Routing option should be XXX. Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
Security Code Security Code Description A mailbox can have a security code to guard against unauthorized access. A mailbox can have a security code to protect it from unauthorized access. A Security Code must be 4 digits long, using 0-9. If a subscriber wants to keep their mailbox private, they can enter a Security Code. No one else can use the subscriber’s mailbox unless they know the code. Conditions • None Default Setting • Always available, but no Security Codes entered.
Security Code Deleting a Security Code (From your System Administrator’s Mailbox) [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. SA (72) Access System Administrator options. [System Admin] - [N/A] S (7) Select Subscriber Mailbox Maintenance options. [Subscriber] - [Subs] Enter the number of the Subscriber Mailbox you want to maintain. S (7) # 0 Erase mailbox’s Security Code. [Erase Security Code] - [N/A] Go back to System Administrator options.
Single Digit Dialing Single Digit Dialing Description Allows an Automated Attendant caller to press a single key for an extension, another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. Single Digit Dialing simplifies the Automated Attendant since the caller just dials a single digit to reach an extension or use an option.
Single Digit Dialing Programming Refer to the Dial Action Table Key Action Summary (page 466) for more. Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Instruction Menu (page 507) The active Instruction Menu should describe the Single Digit Dialing options. Also refer to the Dial Action Table Key Action Summary (page 466). IntraMail Features Operation Refer to the Dial Action Table Key Action Summary (page 466) for more.
Subscriber Mailbox Subscriber Mailbox Description The mailbox type normally used for telephone system extensions. A Subscriber Mailbox is the type of mailbox assigned to a telephone system extension. The telephone assigned to the Subscriber Mailbox is called the subscriber’s extension. When an extension user accesses their voice mail, they are using their Subscriber Mailbox. It provides the IntraMail voice messaging services.
Subscriber Mailbox Operation N/A DSX Software Manual IntraMail Features ◆ 575 IntraMail Features Conversation Record (page 462) Enable or disable the Conversation Record beep for the Subscriber Mailbox. Greeting (page 493) A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for their mailbox. Callers to the user’s mailbox hear the prerecorded personalized greeting.
System Administrator System Administrator Description The extension user that has IntraMail system administration capabilities. The System Administrator is a Subscriber Mailbox that has unique system administration features such as recording Instruction Menus and deleting messages in a co-worker’s mailbox. The System Administrator features are an essential part of IntraMail setup since they allow the recording of the system-wide messages and provide Subscriber Mailbox maintenance.
System Administrator Programming 1. Designate a Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. 1. In 2142-03: System Administrator (page 767), enter Yes. Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Subscriber Mailbox (page 574) Only a Subscriber Mailbox can be a System Administrator. IntraMail Features Operation Refer to the individual features referenced in the System Administrator Options (page 576).
System Administrator Mailbox System Administrator Mailbox Description A Subscriber Mailbox option that enables the system administration capabilities. A System Administrator Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox in which you have enabled the System Administrator option. This provides the subscriber with system administration capabilities. IntraMail can have multiple System Administrator Mailboxes. Turn to System Administrator (page 576) for more.
System Reinitialization System Reinitialization Description Reinitializing IntraMail returns all programmed options to their default values. Initializing the telephone system automatically initializes all IntraMail programming. You may want to do this if the site requirements significantly change and it is easier to start over from default than remove all your custom programming. Reinitializing returns all programmed options to their default values.
Time and Date with Voice Mail Time and Date with Voice Mail Description Set the system time and date. Since IntraMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software, the IntraMail time and date is the same as the phone system time and date. Since time and date is used on telephone displays and with the Auto Time Stamp and Time and Date Stamp features, be sure to set it accurately. To change the time and date, use either the system programmable options or the User Programmable features.
Time and Date Stamp Time and Date Stamp Description A mailbox user can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time the message was sent, as well as the caller’s number. While listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user can dial TI to hear the Time and Date the message was left. This is a handy option while reviewing messages. The subscriber can just dial a code to find out when the message arrived.
Time and Date Stamp Operation Hearing the Time and Date a Message was Left [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. L (5) Access the Message Listen mode. [Listen] - [Lstn] TI (84) 0 582 ◆ Hear the time and date the message was sent. • Turn to Listening to Messages (page 512) for more on your listening options.
Transfer to a Mailbox Transfer to a Mailbox Description An extension user can transfer their active call to a co-worker’s mailbox. An extension user can transfer their active call to a co-worker’s mailbox. This lets the caller leave a personal message for the co-worker. Transfer to a Mailbox is one of the big conveniences of IntraMail since the caller can state their business and not have to call back later. It saves the caller time and cuts down on unnecessary telephone system call processing.
Transfer to a Mailbox Operation Transferring Calls to a Mailbox In these instructions: [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer your active call to a mailbox: Method A (Ring first, then Transfer) 1. Press TRANSFER. 2. Dial the number of the mailbox to receive the Transfer. • You can optionally press the DSS key for your co-worker. • To transfer the call to your own mailbox, dial your extension number. 3. Press V-MAIL and hang up. • Voice mail will prompt your caller to leave a message.
Transfer to a UCD Group Transfer to a UCD Group Description The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to UCD Group master numbers. The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to a UCD Group master number. If a customer has a UCD Group set up for a department (such as Sales or Tech Service), the Automated Attendant can send calls directly to that department without any operator intervention. It is not necessary to have a company employee handle the calls.
Undefined Routing Undefined Routing Description A key pad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no routing defined. An Automated Attendant Undefined Routing is a Dial Action Table key assignment for which there is no routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit and there is no routing assigned, IntraMail plays, “That is an invalid entry.” IntraMail then repeats the dialing options (Instruction Menu) to the caller.
Unscreened Transfer Unscreened Transfer Description Similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. Unscreened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial system extensions. Unscreened Transfer (and its related feature Screened Transfer) allows the IntraMail Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to system extensions without the need for a live receptionist or operator.
Unscreened Transfer If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is on (see page 427 for more on this feature): Extension Idle With Active Greeting Recorded or Not Recorded Extension Busy Extension in DND 1. Sends call immediately to mailbox: -Plays greeting (if recorded), or -Prompts caller to start recording. 1 After the 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) interval. 2 Custom phone system programming may redirect the unanswered call (for example, to a hunt group or another extension).
Unscreened Transfer Other Related Features Operation N/A DSX Software Manual IntraMail Features ◆ 589 IntraMail Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Automated Attendant (page 433) The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Voice Mail Overflow Voice Mail Overflow Description Insures that IntraMail will pick up calls that don’t go through. The telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the IntraMail Automated Attendant. Voice Mail Overflow ensures that IntraMail will pick up calls that don’t go through. This allows callers to leave a message rather than having to call back later.
Voice Mail Overflow Setting Up UCD Group Overflow 1. To set up UCD Group overflow: 1. See Group Mailbox (page 497). Setting Up Ring Group Overflow 1. To set up UCD Group overflow: 1. See Group Mailbox (page 497). 1. IntraMail Features Setting Up DIL Overflow To set up DIL overflow during the day: 1. In 3112-02: Enable Day Overflow (page 819), enter Yes to activate overflow during the day. 2. In 3112-03: Day Overflow Destination (page 820), enter the IntraMail master number (700). 2.
Voice Mail Overflow Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Automated Attendant (page 433) The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls. Call Routing Mailbox (page 450) The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Voice Prompting Messages Voice Prompting Messages Description IntraMail provides Voice Prompts that tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. IntraMail provides the telephone system with Voice Prompting Messages which tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. For example, if an extension user calls a co-worker while their extension is in DND, they hear, “Please do not disturb.” Voice Prompting Messages guide the user while using certain features.
Volume Control with Voice Mail Volume Control with Voice Mail Description A mailbox user can turn the volume up or down while listening to their messages. Since IntraMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software, Volume Control is available at a subscriber’s keyset any time while listening to a message, greeting, or prerecorded voice prompt. Volume Controls let the user interactively adjust the loudness of the IntraMail messages and prompts to a comfortable level.
10xx-Configuration 100x-System 1001-Version System Options: 1001-1702 10xx-Configuration 1001-Version 100x-System Description Use this program to check the system type, the system’s software version number, and version number of the embedded DSP. System 1001-1702 Options 1001-01: System Type (System Type) Use this option to display the system name. This is a fixed option which you cannot modify.
10xx-Configuration 100x-System 1001-Version 1001-03: DSP Version (DSP Version) Use this option to display the version of the embedded DSP software. This is a fixed option which you cannot modify.
10xx-Configuration 101x-ID 1011-Name 101x-ID 1011-Name Description Use this program to enter the system name and telephone number. Options 1011-01: System Name (System Name) Use this option to enter the site name (up to 18 characters). Use the Name Programming Chart (page 598) when entering names. Features • System Identification (page 334) IntraMail Features • None System 1001-1702 Options • See the Name Programming Chart (page 598).
10xx-Configuration 101x-ID 1011-Name Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character Key 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 1 & - / ‘ 1 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y 0 space : 0 # Not used * Not used 8 Times 9 Times s 7 z 9 After selecting
10xx-Configuration 102x-Time 1021-Set Time and Date 1021-Set Time and Date 102x-Time Description Use this program to set the system time and date. Options 1021-01: System Time (Time) Use this option to set the system time. Enter data using the 24-hour format HH:MM:SS. For example, 13:00:00 = 1:00 PM. The system shows Time and Date on telephone displays and in various system reports.
10xx-Configuration 102x-Time 1022-Daylight Savings Time 1022-Daylight Savings Time Description Use this program to set the Automatic Daylight Savings Time option. Options 1022-01: Automatic Daylight Savings Time Setting (Auto D.S.T.) Use this option to enable or disable automatic Daylight Savings Time adjustment. If enabled, the system will automatically set the time back 1 hour at 2:00 AM on the last Sunday in October and set the time forward 1 hour at 2:00 AM on the first Sunday in April.
10xx-Configuration 102x-Time 1023-Internet (Network Time Server [NTS]) 1023-Internet (Network Time Server [NTS]) Description Use this program to specify the Network Time Server (NTS). Options 1023-01: Network Time Server Name (Server Name) Use this option to enter the IP address of the Network Time Server (NTS), if any. The system will synchronize it’s date and time with this source. Features • None IntraMail Features • None DSX Software Manual System 1001-1702 Options • IP address in the format xxx.
10xx-Configuration 103x-Programming 1031-Password Entry 1031-Password Entry 103x-Programming Description Use the program to customize the system passwords. Options 1031-01: New Password (New Password) Use this option to change the system passwords. The table below shows the default system passwords. To avoid having to reinitialize your system, always keep a careful record of your passwords.
11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1101-RS232 Settings 11xx-CPU 1101-RS232 Settings 110x-I/O Description Use this program to specify the baud rate of the system’s serial port, as well as indicate when an external modem is connected to the system. Options 1101-01: Baud Rate (Baud Rate) Use this option to set the baud rate of the system’s RS232 port.
11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1102-Modem Settings 1102-Modem Settings Description TBD Options TBD 604 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual
11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1103-USB Settings 1103-USB Settings Description TBD Options TBD System 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 605
11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1104-Ethernet Setup 1104-Ethernet Setup Description Use this program to set the DSX system’s IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. Options 1104-01: System IP Address (IP Addr) Use this option to set the DSX system’s IP address. You must set the IP address if you intend to connect to the system’s ethernet port. There are two ways to connect: ❥ To the site’s local area network (LAN) using a standard CAT5 patch cord.
11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1104-Ethernet Setup IntraMail Features • None Options • Digits using 0-9, 12 max. in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Default • 255.255.255.0 1104-03: Default Gateway (Default Gateway) The gateway address is the address in the site router to which all outbound traffic is routed. The gateway address is required in order for DSX to communicate with computers not on your LAN (i.e., over the internet or a private WAN).
11xx-CPU 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup 1111-DTMF Setup 111x-Tones Description Use this program to set the DTMF durations for manual and Speed Dial calls. Options 1111-01: Manual DTMF Tone On (Man DTMF On) Use this option to set the duration of DTMF digits for outside calls manually dialed by an extension user. This is required because the system buffers the digits the user dials. Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
11xx-CPU 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup Default • 100 mS System 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 609
11xx-CPU 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup 1111-04: Speed Dial DTMF Tone Off (SPD DTMF Off) Use this option to set the duration the quiet time between DTMF digits for Speed Dial outside calls automatically dialed by the system. Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too short, the telco or PBX/Centrex may not be able to set up to receive the next DTMF digit. If too long, outbound dialing is unnecessarily slowed down.
12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1201-Type (Station Card Type) 12xx-Slots 1201-Type (Station Card Type) 120x-Stations Description This program allows you to set the type for each station PCB plugged into your system. Options 1201-01: Card Type (Card Type) Use this option to define the type of station PCB plugged into each equipment cabinet PCB slot. Although PCBs auto-ID as you insert them, this option allows you to preconfigure a system prior to installation.
12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1202-Ports (Primary Station Ports) 1202-Ports (Primary Station Ports) Description Use this program to customize the system’s primary station port assignments. Options 1202-01: Primary Station Port Assignment (xx Port xx Station) Use this option to associate physical (hardware) station ports with software station ports. If you installed your PCBs in order from left to right, and let Automatic Slot Configuration set up your system, your hardware and software ports should match.
12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1203-Secondary Station Ports 1203-Secondary Station Ports Description Use this program to customize the system’s secondary station port assignments. This is only required when installing a Digital VANGARD voice mail. Options 1203-01: Secondary Station Port Assignment (xx Port xx Station) Use this option to select a station port’s select port assignment. Currently, the secondary station port is only used for Digital VANGARD voice mail.
12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1211-Lines (Line Card Type) 1211-Lines (Line Card Type) 121x-Lines Description This program allows you to set the type for each line PCB plugged into your system. Options 1211-01: Card Type (Card Type) Use this option to define the type of line PCB plugged into each equipment cabinet PCB slot. Although PCBs auto-ID as you insert them, this option allows you to preconfigure a system prior to installation.
12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1212-Ports 1212-Ports Description Use this program to customize the system’s line port assignments. Options 1212-01: Line Port Assignment (xx Port xx Station) Use this option to associate physical (hardware) line ports with software line ports. If you installed your PCBs in order from left to right, and let Automatic Slot Configuration set up your system, your hardware and software ports should match.
12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup Description Use this program to set up the parameters of the T1/E1 PCBs. Options 1213-01: Number of PCM Channels (# PCM Channels) Use this option to determine the number of active channels on the PCB. PCBs configured for T1 have 24 available channels, while E1 has 30. Enter the number of channels to be active, or enter 0 to activate all channels. If you are using all channels in the T1, leave this entry at 0.
12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup 1213-03: Transmit Pulse Amplitude (Tx Pulse Ampl.) This option controls the amplitude (strength) of the T1 signals transmitted by the PCB to the telco smart jack or your CSU (if used). Entries 0-4 correspond to the distance from the T1 PCB to either the telco’s smart jack or your CSU (depending on your installation). The T1 PCB automatically adjusts the signal amplitude based on your entry. You can alternately use entries 5-7 to make fixed attenuation entries.
12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 1213-05: Zero Suppression (B8ZS/HDB3) Use this option to enable or disable zero suppression for the PCB transmit path. If enabled, T1 PCBs use B8ZS zero suppression, while E1 PCBs use HDB3 zero suppression. If disabled, the PCB has no transmit zero suppression. (Note the receive zero suppression is always enabled.
12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup Options • 0 for none • 1 for metallic • 2 digital • 3 for remote • 4 for ST-Bus • 5 for payload Default • 0 System 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 619
13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits 13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits Description Use this option to customize the system’s number plan. For each dialed digit (0-9, excluding # and *), assign a Function Type and an Expected Digits entry. Function Type defines the digit’s function in the system (see the table below).
13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits IntraMail Features • Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan (page 488) Options • 1-3 Default • See Default Dialing Plan (page 621). Default Dialing Plan Digit Description Function Type Expected Digits 0 Use this option to define the Function Type and Expected Digits for dial strings beginning with 0. These strings are normally used for telephone system operator access (1).
13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits Default Dialing Plan Digit Description Function Type Expected Digits 8 Use this option to define the Function Type and Expected Digits for dial strings beginning with 8. These strings are normally reserved for Intercom access (2). 2 (Extension 3 9 Use this option to define the total length of dial strings beginning with 9. These strings are normally 1 digit long for dial-9 line access.
13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1311-Stations 1311-Stations 131x-Extensions Description Use this program to customize extension numbering. Options 1311-01: Station Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign an extension number to each station.
13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1312-Voice Mail Ports 1312-Voice Mail Ports Description Use this program to customize voice mail extension numbering. Options 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign an extension number to each voice mail station.
13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1313-Lines 1313-Lines Description Use this program to customize line extension numbers. Options 1313-01: Line Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign an extension number to each line.
13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1314-Ring Groups 1314-Ring Groups Description Use this program to customize Ring Group master extension numbers. Options 1314-01: Ring Group Master Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign a master extension number to each Ring Group. Although the master numbers are preassigned by default, you can customize them to meet the site requirements. The extension numbers you use must be unique and cannot be a physical port (e.g., 300).
13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1315-UCD Groups 1315-UCD Groups Description Use this program to customize UCD Group master extension numbers. Options 1315-01: UCD Group Master Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign a master extension number to each UCD Group. Although the master numbers are preassigned by default, you can customize them to meet the site requirements. The extension numbers you use must be unique and cannot be a physical port (e.g., 300).
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features 14xx-COS (Class of Service) 1401-Features 140x-Station Description Use this program to customize station (extension) Class of Service options. Options 1401-01: System Speed Dial Access (System SPD) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to access System Speed Dial.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features Default • No (0) - Disabled 1401-04: ACD Supervisor (ACD Sprvsr) This option is not used. 1401-05: Soft Keys (Soft Keys) Use this option to enable or disable a keyset’s Interactive Soft Keys. Features • Interactive Soft Keys (page 210) IntraMail Features • None 1401-06: Conversation Record (Record Conv) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to record conversations into their mailbox.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features Default • No (0) - Disabled 1401-08: Receive DID Calls (Allow DID Calls) Use this option to enable or disable the extension’s ability to receive DID calls. If enabled, the extension will receive DID calls routed to it by the system. If disabled, the extension will not receive DID calls. If a DID call attempts to route to an extension with this option disabled, the call follows Line Overflow.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features 1401-09: Receive DID Camp-On (DID Camp-On) Use this option to enable or disable the ability of a DID call to Camp-On to the extension when it is busy. If enabled, a DID call to the extension will Camp-On for the 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer. If still unanswered, the call will divert to Key Ring. If disabled, the incoming call will not Camp-On and the caller will hear busy tone.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features 1401-12: Call Screening (Call Screening) Use this option to enable or disable Call Screening. If enabled, a display keyset use can listen to (screen) a voice mail message as it is being left in their mailbox. If disabled, voice mail messages go to the mailbox normally.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1402-Access 1402-Access Description Use this program to customize station access Class of Service options. Options 1402-01: Forced Line Disconnect (Forced Disconnect) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Forced Line Disconnect.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1402-Access Default • Yes 1402-04: Silent Monitor (Silent Monitor) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Silent Monitor. Features • Monitor / Silent Monitor (page 243) IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 1402-05: Activate Night Mode (Night Mode) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to activate Night Service.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) Description Use this program to customize single line telephone Class of Service options. Options 1403-01: Flash for Single Line Set (Flash for SLT) Use this option to enable or disable hookflash for analog single line extensions.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 1403-04: High Voltage Message Waiting Lamp for Single Line Set (HV MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable High Voltage Message Waiting for single line ports. High Voltage Message Waiting is not available in DSX-40. If both this option and 1403-05: FSK Message Waiting Lamp for Single Line Set are enabled, the system uses FSK Message Waiting.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) System 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 637
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1404-Caller ID 1404-Caller ID Description Use this program to customize Caller ID Class of Service options. Options 1404-01: Caller ID Display (CID Display) Use this option to enable or disable the ability of an extension to display Caller ID. If enabled, Caller ID will occur for all extensions with this Class of Service provided Caller ID is enabled in other system programming. If disabled, Caller ID will never occur for extensions with this Class of Service.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1404-Caller ID Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 1404-04: Caller ID Display Separator (CID Display “-”) Use this option to enable or disable the Caller ID display separator. If enabled, the telephone displays a dash separator after the area code and after the local exchange on a 7 or 10 digit number. If disabled, the calling party number displays without a separator.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1404-Caller ID Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 640 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1405-Distinctive Ringing 1405-Distinctive Ringing Description Use this program to customize Distinctive Ringing Class of Service options. Options 1405-01: Ring Type Configuration (Ring Config) If enabled, this option allows an extension to customize the sound of their Ring Types by pressing the CONFIG (CNFG) soft key. If disabled, the extension cannot customize their Ring Types and the system hides the CONFIG (CNFG) soft key.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1405-Distinctive Ringing IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 642 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1406-Call Forwarding Options 1406-Call Forwarding Options Description Use this program to customize Call Forwarding Class of Service options. Options 1406-01: Call Forwarding Off-Premises (Off-Premise) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Off Premise Call Forwarding. When disabled, the Off Premise Call Forwarding option is hidden on the telephone display.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1407-Paging 1407-Paging Description Use this program to customize paging Class of Service options. Options 1407-01: Make All Call Page (All Call Page) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make an All Call Paging announcement.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1407-Paging 1407-04: Make Page Into Zone 3 (Page Zone 3) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 3.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1407-Paging Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 1407-08: Make Page Into Zone 7 (Page Zone 7) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 7.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1411-Access 141x-Line 1411-Access Description Use this program to customize line access Class of Service options. Options 1411-01: Camp-On to Busy Lines (Camp-On Busy Lines) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Camp-On to a busy line. This option does not restrict Callback.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1411-Access Default • No (0) - Disabled 1411-04: Enhanced Last Number Redial (Enhanced LND) Use this option to enable or disable Enhanced Last Number Redial for the extension. If enabled, the extension has Enhanced Last Number Redial with the 5 number redial buffer and the enhanced operation. If disabled, the extension has traditional Last Number Redial with a single number redial buffer and the standard operation.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1412-Toll Restriction 1412-Toll Restriction Description Use this program to customize Class of Service options that affect call restriction. Options 1412-01: Walking Class of Service (Day) (Walking COS Day) Use this option to enable or disable Walking Class of Service for the extension while the system is in the day mode. This option affects the extension implementing this feature, not the extension at which the feature is being used.
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1412-Toll Restriction Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 650 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual
14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1412-Toll Restriction 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (Forced A/C) Use this option to enable or disable Forced Account Codes. If disabled, Optional Account Codes are still available.
15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1501-Setup 15xx-Options 1501-Setup 150x-Operators Description Use this program to specify the number of system operators. Options 1501-01: Number of Operators (# of Operators) Use this option to specify the number of operators in the system (1-4).
15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1502-Assignments 1502-Assignments Description Use this program to assign the system’s operator extensions. If you enabled more than one operator in 150101: Number of Operators (page 652), all four of the following options are available. However, only the number you specified in 1501-01: Number of Operators will function. Options 1502-01: Operator Number 1 (Operator 1) Assign the first operator’s extension number.
15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1502-Assignments Default • None 1502-04: Operator Number 4 (Operator 4) Assign the fourth operator’s extension number. Be sure you have entered the correct number of operators in 1501-01: Number of Operators (page 652).
15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1511-Display 1511-Display 151x-Stations Description Use this program to select the extension name entry format and clock display. Options 1511-01: Name Format (Name Format) Use this option to determine how extension names should be entered in 2101-02: Station Name (page 720) or via the telephone. The options are 1 (first-last) and 2 (last-first).
15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1511-Display 1511-02: Clock Display Format (Clock Display Format) Use this option to change the format of a keyset’s Time and Date display. See the chart below for available entries. After changing the entry for this option, an extension user must either lift and replace the handset or receive an incoming call before their display will show the new format.
15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1512-Calls 1512-Calls Description Use this program to set up the call handling Auto Handsfree and Call Waiting tones options. Options 1512-01: Automatic Handsfree (Auto-Handsfree) Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Handsfree system-wide.
15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1513-Intercom 1513-Intercom Description Use this program to enable or disable Intercom voice announcements and Auto Handsfree system-wide. Options 1513-01: Intercom Voice Announcements (Voice Announce) Use this option to enable or disable system-wide voice-announced Intercom calls. You must enable this option if you have 1513-02: Handsfree Reply (Handsfree Answerback) enabled below. If you disable this option, extension users can only receive ringing Intercom calls.
15xx-Options 152x-MOH/BGM 1521-Setup 1521-Setup 152x-MOH/BGM Description Use this program to set up options for Music on Hold and Background Music. Options 1521-01: Enable Music on Hold (Enable MOH) Use this option to enable or disable Music on Hold system wide.
15xx-Options 152x-MOH/BGM 1521-Setup Default • 0 1521-04: Background Music over External Page (BGM Over Page) Enable this option to have Background Music (if installed) play over the system's External Page. Disable this option if you don't want Background Music to play over the system's External Page.
15xx-Options 152x-MOH/BGM 1521-Setup 1521-05: Audio Input 1 Gain Setting (Audio #1 Gain) Use this option to set the gain (volume) of Audio Input 1. Features • Music on Hold (page 246) IntraMail Features • None Options • 01-25 (-12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps) Default • 13 (0 dB) 1521-06: Audio Input 2 Gain Setting (Audio #2 Gain) System 1001-1702 Use this option to set the gain (volume) of Audio Input 2.
15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1531-Setup 1531-Setup 153x-Paging Description Use this program to set up External Paging. Options 1531-01: External Page Ring Type (Page Ring Type) Use this option to indicate the type of ringing that will broadcast over the External Page (none, station, or line).
15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1531-Setup 1531-03: External Page Ring Volume (Page Ring Volume) Use this option to adjust the volume of ringing over the External Paging system. This option does not affect the volume of Background Music, Door Chime, or External Page voice broadcasts. You can additionally control the volume of audio broadcasting from the External Page port in 1531-05: External Page Gain.
15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1531-Setup 1531-04: Door Chime Over External Page (Page DoorChime) Use this option to enable Door Chimes over External Page. Features • Paging (page 259) IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 1531-05: External Page Gain (External Page Gain) Use this option to control the volume of any audio broadcasting from the External Page output. This includes Page broadcasts, Door Chimes, and ringing.
15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1532-Ring Control 1532-Ring Control Description If External Paging is set up to broadcast line ringing, use this program to specify the ringing type for each line. Options 1532-[01-64]: External Page Line Ringing (Line nn Ring) If 1531-01: External Page Ring Type is 2 (line), use this option to individually set the ringing for each line over the External Page.
15xx-Options 154x-SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 1541-Setup 154x-SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 1541-Setup Description Use this program to set up the SMDR options. Options 1541-01: SMDR Port (SMDR Port) Use this option to specify the port the system uses for SMDR.
15xx-Options 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup Description Use this program to customize system-wide Account Code options. Options 1551-01: Dial # to Enter Account Codes (# Key AC Codes) Use this option to enable an extension user to dial # to enter an Account Code while on an outside call. If disabled, the extension user can only enter an Account Code by pressing the Account Code soft key or a uniquely programmed Account Code Programmable Function Key.
15xx-Options 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level (AC Toll Level) If 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only (page 651) is enabled, use this option to differentiate toll calls from local calls for Account Code purposes. If you enter 0 for this option, toll calls are any calls the user dials that begin with 0 or 1.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect incoming calls. Options 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer (Ring No Answer) Use this option to set how long Hold Recall rings the extension that placed the call on hold before Key Ring occurs. Key Ring rings all extensions programmed to ring for that line.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers Options • 1-9999 seconds • 0 for disabled Default • 15 seconds 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (CFWD No Answer) For Call Forwarding Ring No Answer, use this option set how long a forwarded call rings an unanswered extension before routing to the forwarding destination.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect outgoing calls. Options 1602-01: Interdigit Timer (Interdigit Time) Use this option to set the Intercom interdigit time. When an extension user places a call, they must dial each succeeding digit within this interval.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers Options • 1-9999 in 100 mS increments (e.g., 10 = 1 second, 100 = 10 seconds).
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers 1602-04: Dial Pause Timer (Interdigit Time) Use this option to set the length of a pause stored in a Speed Dial bin.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-99 seconds Default • 6 674 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1603-Recall Timers 1603-Recall Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect system recalls. Options 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (Transfer Recall) Options • 1-9999 seconds • 0 for disabled Default • 1 second 1603-02: Hold Recall Timer (Hold recall) Use this option to set how long a call stays on Hold before it recalls the extension that initially placed it on Hold.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1603-Recall Timers Options • 1-9999 seconds • 0 for disabled Default • 90 seconds 676 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1603-Recall Timers 1603-04: Park Orbit Recall Timer (Orbit Recall) Use this option to set how long a call stays in System Park Orbit before it recalls the extension that parked it. This timer if for orbits 60-67 only. The recall for orbits 68 and 69 is fixed at 5 minutes.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1604-Station Timers 1604-Station Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect stations. Options 1604-01: Delay Ring Timer (Delay Ring) Use this option to set how long the system waits before ringing an extension that has the Delayed Ringing option enabled. This timer also sets the delay interval for delay ring lines ringing the External Paging system.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1604-Station Timers Features • Extended Ringing (page 153) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-9999 seconds • 0 for disabled Default • 20 seconds System 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 679
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1605-Control Timers 1605-Control Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect various system features. Options 1605-01: Page Duration Timer (Page Duration) Use this option to set the maximum length of Page announcements.
16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1605-Control Timers 1605-04: Forced Program Exit Timer (Program Exit) Use this option to set the Forced Program Exit timer. If a telephone in the programming mode is inactive longer than this interval, the system automatically cancels the programming mode and makes the telephone idle.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect incoming calls on the line (COIU) PCBs. Options 1611-01: Minimum Ring Detect Timer (Ring Detect) Use this option to set the threshold for ring detection. If the ring signal is longer than this interval, the system interprets the signal as valid ringing. If the signal is equal to or shorter than this interval, the system ignores the ringing.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming 1611-03: Minimum Double Ring Detection Off Timer (Double Ring Min) The system uses this option to detect valid double ring from the connected PBX. Valid double ring must be longer than this interval.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming 1611-04: Maximum Double Ring Detection Off Timer (Double Ring Max) The system uses this option to detect valid double ring from the connected PBX. Valid double ring must be less than this interval. Features • None IntraMail Features • None Options • 8-2040 mS Default • 576 mS 1611-05: Ringing Signal End Detection Timer (Ring Stop) Use this option to set the Ringing Signal End Detection time.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1612-Outgoing 1612-Outgoing Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect outgoing calls on the line (COIU) PCBs. Options 1612-01: DP Break Timer (Break Time) Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial Pulse Break signal (i.e., relay open). This is the “off” time in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1612-Outgoing Options • 100-9999 mS Default • 800 mS 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (Flash 1 Time) Use this timer to set the Flash interval. When a user flashes a line (manually or in a Speed Dial number), the system opens the line circuit for this interval. For accurate flash function, be sure to set this interval for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too short, the telco may not always register the flash.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1612-Outgoing 1612-07: Shunt Pause Timer (Shunt Pause) Use this option to set the Shunt Pause Timer (Dial Pulse Mute Timer) for the ATRU PCB. While dial pulsing or doing a Flash, the ATRU PCB switches a low resistance shunt across tip and ring to maintain the correct impedance on the line. When dialing or flashing is complete, the ATRU PCB waits this interval before releasing the shunt. This option does not apply to the COIU PCB.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1613-Loop Control 1613-Loop Control Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect the loop on the line (COIU) PCBs. Options 1613-01: Loop Current Detection Timer (Loop Detect) For loop start lines, loop current must be present for this interval before the system seizes the line. Set this interval for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too short, the system may inadvertently seize unstable lines.
16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1613-Loop Control 1613-03: Power Failure Recovery Detect Timer (Loop Recovery) Use this option to set the Power Failure Recovery Detect time. When the ATRU or COIU PCB recovers from a power failure, it checks the power failure line for loop current for this interval. If loop current is detected, it assumes the power failure telephone is still connected and does not tear down the call.
16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect incoming calls to analog single line telephones. Options 1621-01: Minimum DP Break Timer (Minimum Break) Use this option to define the minimum amount of time the loop must be opened to properly decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog devices connected to single line PCBs.
16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 1621-03: Minimum DP Make Timer (Minimum Make) Use this option to define the minimum amount of time the loop must be closed to properly decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog devices connected to single line PCBs. Change this value only if the connected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10 PPS.
16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 1621-04: Maximum DP Make Timer (Maximum Make) Use this option to define the maximum amount of time the loop must be closed to properly decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog devices connected to SLIU PCBs. Change this value only if the connected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10 PPS.
16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming IntraMail Features • None Options • 5-1275 mS Default • 105 mS 1621-08: Dial Pulse Guard Timer (Dial Pulse Guard) Use this option to set the interval the single line PCB waits between dial pulse digits before attempting to detect any additional DP digits. This timer helps prevent erroneous DP dialing due to hardware stabilization.
16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1622-Outgoing 1622-Outgoing Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect outgoing calls from analog single line telephones. Options 1622-01: Loop Disconnect Timer (Loop Disconnect) Use this option to determine how long the single line PCB opens the loop to the connected analog device after the far end disconnects.
16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect incoming T1/E1 calls. Options 1631-01: Receive Loop Detection Timer (Rx Loop Detect) For loop start T1 lines, loop current must be present for this interval before the system seizes the line. Set this interval for compatibility with the T1 service provider. If you set this interval too short, the system may inadvertently seize unstable lines.
16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 104 mS 1631-04: Receive Dial Pulse Minimum Make Timer (Rx Min Make) Use this option to set the minimum required duration of the T1 circuit receive Dial Pulse Make signal (i.e., relay closed). This is the minimum “on” time in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this timer for compatibility with the T1 service provider. Keep in mind that there are three components of a Dial Pulse digit: Make interval, Break interval and Interdigit interval.
16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming 1631-07: Receive Maximum Flash Timer (Rx Max Flash) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 16-4080 mS Default • 1008 mS 1631-08: Receive Minimum Clear Signal Timer (Rx Min Clear) System 1001-1702 Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1632-Outgoing 1632-Outgoing Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect outgoing T1/E1 calls. Options 1632-01: Transmit Dial Pulse Break Timer (Tx Break Time) Use this option to set the duration of the T1 circuit transmit Dial Pulse Break signal (i.e., relay open). This is the “off” time in a Dial Pulse digit. Set this timer for compatibility with the T1 service provider.
16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1632-Outgoing IntraMail Features • None Options • 16-4080 mS Default • 800 mS 1632-04: Transmit Flash Timer (Tx Flash Time) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None System 1001-1702 Options • 16-4080 mS Default • 800 mS 1632-05: Transmit Clear Signal Timer (Tx Clear Time) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1641-Ring Detect 164x-T1 Specific 1641-Ring DetectTimers Description Use this program to adjust the T1 Ring Detect timers. Options 1641-01: Minimum Ring Detect Timer (Ring Detect) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 8-2040 mS Default • 104 mS 1641-02: Single Ring Minimum Detection Timer (Single Ring Min) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1641-Ring Detect Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 304 mS 1641-05: Ring Stop Detection Timer (Ring Stop) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1642-Call Control 1642-Call Control Description Use this program to adjust the T1 Call Control timers. Options 1642-01: Transmit Wink Timer (TX Wink Time) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 152 mS 1642-02: Receive Minimum Wink Timer (Rx Min Wink) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1642-Call Control Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS • 0 for undefined (disabled) Default • Undefined (disabled) System 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 703
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1651-TX (Transmit Timers) 165x-E1 Specific 1651-TX (Transmit Timers Timers) Description Use this program to adjust the E1 transmit timers. Options 1651-01: Transmit Seize Acknowledge Timer (Tx Seize Ack) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 100 mS 1651-02: Transmit Digit Acknowledge Timer (Tx Digit Ack) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1651-TX (Transmit Timers) Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 16-4080 mS Default • 1008 mS 1651-05: Transmit Seize Signal (BZL) Timer (Tx Seize Signal (BZL)) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None System 1001-1702 Options • 8-2040 mS Default • 800 mS 1651-06: Transmit Double Answer (BZL) Timer (Tx Double Answer BZL) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) 1652-RX (Receive Timers) Description Use this program to adjust the E1 receive timers. Options 1652-01: Receive Minimum Seize Acknowledge Timer (Rx Min Seize Ack) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 100 mS 1652-02: Receive Maximum Seize Acknowledge Timer (Rx Max Seize Ack) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 300 mS 1652-05: Receive Minimum Answer Timer (Rx Min Answer) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None System 1001-1702 Options • 8-2040 mS Default • 200 mS 1652-06: Receive Maximum Answer Timer (Rx Max Answer) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) 1652-08: Receive Maximum Meter Pulse Timer (Rx Max Meter Pls) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 300 mS 1652-09: Receive Minimum Double Answer (BZL) Timer (Rx Min Dbl Answer [BZL]) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) Default • 2048 mS 1652-12: Receive Line Block Recover Timer (Rx Line Block Recover) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1653-MFC Incoming Timers 1653-MFC Incoming Timers Description Use this program to adjust the E1 MFC incoming timers. Options 1653-01: GI Signal Timer (GI Signal) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-32 seconds Default • 12 seconds 1653-02: GI Tone Complete Timer (GI Tone Complete) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1653-MFC Incoming Timers Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 50-600 mS Default • 100 mS System 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 711
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1654-MFC Outgoing Timers 1654-MFC Outgoing Timers Description Use this program to adjust the E1 MFC outgoing timers. Options 1654-01: GA Response Timer (GA Response) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-32 seconds Default • 12 seconds 1654-02: GA Tone Complete Timer (GA Tone Complete) Information to be provided.
16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1654-MFC Outgoing Timers Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-32 seconds Default • 12 seconds 1654-05: GC Response Timer (GC Response) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None System 1001-1702 Options • 1-32 seconds Default • 12 seconds 1654-06: GC Tone Complete Timer (GC Tone Complete Timer) Information to be provided.
17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1701-Format 17xx-Speed Dial (System) 1701-Format 170x-Setup Description Use this program to set the maximum number of System Speed Dial bins (9, 99, or 999) that users can dial. This does not limit the number of bins you can program in 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) (page 715) and set up under System Speed Dial keys.
17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) Description Use this program to enter System Speed Dial numbers in to system memory. Options 1702-[001-999]: Select System Speed Dial Bin to Program (Bin #) Use this option to select the System Speed Dial bin you want to program (normally 001-999).
17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) • Directory Dialing (page 131) • Speed Dial (page 315) IntraMail Features • Caller ID and Voice Mail (page 456) • External Transfer (page 483) Options • 1-64 for lines 1-64 Default • No entry 1702-[001-999]: System Speed Dial Bin Group (Bin Group) For a type 3 (Line Group) System Speed Dial bin, use this option to select the Line Group (90-98) the bin will use for an outgoing call.
17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) 1702-[001-999]: System Speed Dial Bin Name (Bin Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the System Speed Dial bin. When entering names, use the following Name Programming chart.
17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) IntraMail Features • Caller ID and Voice Mail (page 456) • External Transfer (page 483) Options • Alpha-numeric characters (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type Stations: 2101-2501 21xx-Configuration 2101-Type 210x-Setup Description Use this program to set up basic station (extension) options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options (Type) Use this option to assign circuit type to station devices. All circuit types should auto-ID when the station device is plugged in.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-02: Station Name (Name) Use this option to assign a name (up to 16 characters) to the extension port. Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) • Names for Extensions and Lines (page 249) IntraMail Features • Directory Dialing (page 469) Options • See the Name Programming Chart on the next page. Default • No names entered.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character Key 1 Time CHECK 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 8 Times 9 Times Restore the previous entry, Station 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual Station Options: 2101-2501 ◆ 721
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-03: Station Display Language (Language) Use this option to set the language for the extension’s display (including system programming). You can also set this option from the keyset using the soft keys. Features • Language Selection (page 217) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1 for English • 2 for Spanish Default • 1 2101-04: Door Chime Selection (Door Chime) If the extension is a Door Box, use this option to select the door chime type.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-05: Outgoing ANI ID (ANI ID) For E1 lines only, use this option to specify the outgoing ANI data that identifies the extension (1-4 digits appended to the system’s telephone number). This option is only for E1 MFC dialing. It is not used in North America. The allowable entries are 0-9, #, and * (4 digits). By default, there is no outgoing ANI data entered. Features • None IntraMail Features • None Options • Digits (4 digits max., using 0-9, # and *.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2102-Access 2102-Access Description Use this program to customize station (extension) access options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2102-01: Class of Service (COS) Use this option to assign the extension’s Class of Service. Features • See the Features for each option in 14xx-COS (Class of Service) (page 628).
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2102-Access 2102-04: User Programming Access Level (Pgm Level) Use this option to set an extensions Programming Access Level. This setting determines which User Programmable Features the extension can use.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2103-Ringing 2103-Ringing Description Use this program to customize station (extension) Distinctive Ringing options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2103-01: Day Ring Type (Day Ring Type) Use this option to set the Extension Override Ring Type option for day ring lines ringing the extension. This is the same as following the ASSIGN (ASGN) soft key.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2103-Ringing you make in this option will take effect. If this option is 1-3, the setting you make in this option will only take effect if 1405-02: Station Ring Override (page 641) is also enabled.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2103-Ringing Default • 3 2103-07: Station’s Ring “A” Tone (Type-A Ring Tone) For the station’s type “A” incoming ring, use this option to select the Distinctive Ringing ring tone used. Features • Distinctive Ringing (page 135) IntraMail Features • None Options • 0-9 for ring tones 0-9. Default • 2 2103-08: Station’s Ring “B” Tone (Type-B Ring Tone) For the station’s type “B” incoming ring, use this option to select the Distinctive Ringing ring tone used.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2104-Display 2104-Display Description Use this program to adjust the station (extension) display backlight brightness settings. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2104-01: Backlight Brightness While Active (Active Brightness) Use this option to set the telephone’s backlight brightness while it is active.
21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2104-Display 730 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features 2111-Features 211x-Options Description Use this program to enable or disable various station (extension) features. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2111-01: Allow Do Not Disturb (Allow DND) Use this option to enable or disable Do Not Disturb at the extension.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features 2111-04: Ringing Line Preference (Ringing Line Pref) Use this option to enable or disable Ringing Line Preference for the extension. Features • Ringing Line Preference (page 295) IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 2111-05: Key Access for Outside Lines (Key Line Access) Use this option to enable or disable the extension user’s ability to press a line key to access an outside line.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 2111-08: Answering Machine (Answering Machine) For systems without voice mail that are using a customer-provided answering machine, use this option to designate the extension as an Answering Machine. This will cause any outside call picked up by the answering machine not to be marked as answered in the Caller ID log.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features 2111-09: Personal Speed Dial (Personal SPD) Use this option to enable or disable Personal Speed Dial for the extension. If the extension has this option disabled, Call Forwarding Off Premises is not available.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2112-Speaker Control 2112-Speaker Control Description Use this program to customize features of the station (extension) speaker. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2112-01: Automatic Handsfree (Auto Handsfree) Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Handsfree for the extension.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2112-Speaker Control • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 736 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2112-Speaker Control 2112-04: Voice Announcements in Headset Mode (Headset V.A.) Use this option to enable or disable incoming voice-announced Intercom calls while the extension is in the headset mode. If enable, the user hears 2 beeps in the headset when they receive an incoming Intercom call. If disabled, the user hears ringing over the telephone speaker.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2113-Groups 2113-Groups Description Use this program to assign the various groups to which the station (extension) belongs. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2113-01: Dial 9 Group (Dial 9 Group) Assign the line group (90-98) the extension accesses when the user dials 9 for an outside line or presses a Switched Loop key.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2113-Groups 2113-03: Pickup Group (Pickup Group) Use this option to assign the extension to a Pickup Group.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2113-Groups 2113-04: Privacy Group (Privacy Group) Use this option to assign an extension to a Privacy Release Group. Features • Privacy Release Groups (page 278) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-16 for Privacy Release Groups 1-16 • 0 for unassigned Default • 0 2113-05: Page Group (Zone) (Page Group) Use this option to assign the extension to a page zone.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-Off Hook Options Description Used this program to customize the off-hook options for the station (extension). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2114-01: Prime Line Type (Prime Line Type) Use this option to set the extension’s Prime Line type (none, key, line, or Line Group).
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options Options • 1-64 (lines 1-64) Default • 1 2114-01: Prime Line Group (Prime Line Group) If 2114-01: Prime Line Type is set for line (3), use this option to select the Line Group the extension seizes when the user lifts the handset. The line does not have to be on a Feature Key appearing on the phone. Also use this option to set up Prime Line for single line telephones.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-02: Station Ring Down Type (Ring Down Type) Use this option to set the extension’s Ring Down type (none, extension, System Speed Dial, or Personal Speed Dial).
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-03: Station’s Operator Extension Number (Operator Ext) Assign the extension’s operator. This is the co-worker the extension user reaches when they dial 0.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options Description Use this program to set the Extension Hunting and DID Intercept options for the extension (station). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options UCD Hunting UCD Hunting Programming (for 301, 303 and 304 with master 701) 2115-01: Hunt Type Enter the Hunt Type 5 for all three extensions. 2115-01: UCD Group Master Number Enter 701 for all three extensions. 2302-01: UCD Group Overflow Destination Enter 305 1601-04: UCD No Answer Timer This timer sets when UCD overflow occurs.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options Features • Extension Hunting (page 154) IntraMail Features • None Options • 700 (UCD Group 1) through 707 (UCD Group 8) • None (entered by pressing CLEAR) Default • None Station 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual Station Options: 2101-2501 ◆ 747
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options 2115-02: DID Station Intercept Type (DID Intercept Type) Use this option to set the extension’s DID Intercept type. Intercept can occur when the extension is busy, in Do Not Disturb, or unanswered. Features • Direct Inward Dialing (page 99) IntraMail Features • None Options • 0 for none • 1 for Busy/DND - DID Intercept occurs when the extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2116-Off Hook Signaling Options 2116-Off Hook Signaling Options Description Use this program to set the station (extension) Off-Hook Signaling options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2116-01: Off Hook Signaling for Incoming Intercom Calls (OHS Intercom) Use this option to assign an extension’s Off-Hook Signaling mode for incoming Intercom calls.
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2116-Off Hook Signaling Options 2116-03: Off Hook Signaling for Incoming Outside Calls (OHS Lines) To have the system audibly alert the operator when outside calls are waiting, assign an extension’s Off-Hook Signaling options for outside calls (no Off-Hook Signaling, Call Wait beeps over speaker, or Off-hook ringing).
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2117-Call Logging (Caller ID Logging) 2117-Call Logging (Caller ID Logging) Description Use this program to set up Caller ID Logging at the extension (station). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2117-01: Caller ID Log Type (CID Log Type) Use this option to specify the type of Caller ID Logging at an extension (none, personal, or group).
21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2117-Call Logging (Caller ID Logging) 2117-01: Caller ID Log Group (CID Log Group) If 2117-01: Caller ID Log Type is 2 (group), use this option to specify to which Caller ID Logging Group the extension belongs.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Description Use this program to assign the Feature Keys on a keyset. The defaults are as follows: ❥ In DSX-80/160, keys 1-12 are line keys for lines 1-12 and keys 13-24 are undefined. ❥ In DSX-40, keys 1-8 are line keys for lines 1-8 and keys 9-24 are undefined. ❥ For attendants: - Key 12 (on 22-button) or key 24 (on 34-button) is an Operator Call Key.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 2 of 5) Key Type Hotline (page 207) Description Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Hotline key. Key Code and Data 05 + nnn (extension number) Operation • Press key to call Hotline partner. • Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call. • Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call. • Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 3 of 5) Key Type Group Pickup No Ring (page 184) Description Key Code and Data Operation 10 + nn (Pickup Group 01-16) • Press key to answer call ringing Pickup Group. 11 + nn (Pickup Group 01-16) • Press key to answer call ringing Pickup Group. 13 + n (Page Zone 17, 0 for All Call) • Press key to Page into assigned zone. Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a System Speed Dial key.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 4 of 5) Key Type Description Night Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Night key. There are two options: System Night key and UCD Night key. The System Night key puts all Key Ring lines and lines terminated to Ring Group master numbers into the night mode. The UCD Night key puts all lines terminated to the UCD Group master number into the night mode.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 5 of 5) Key Type Save Number Dialed (page 298) Account Code (page 14) Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Save Number Dialed key. • There is no BLF for this key type. 25 While on a call: • Press key to save the number you just dialed. While idle: • Press key to redial a previously saved number. Use this option to assign a Feature Key as an Account Code key.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Options 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (Key xx Type) Use this option to enter the key codes for an extension’s Feature Keys. Refer to Extension Feature Key Assignments (page 753) for the specifics. Features • Refer to Extension Feature Key Assignments (page 753). IntraMail Features • None Options • Refer to Extension Feature Key Assignments (page 753). Default • In DSX-80/160, keys 1-12 are line keys for lines 1-12 and keys 13-24 are undefined.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2122-Ring Override (Key Ring Override) 2122-Ring Override (Key Ring Override) Description Use this program to set up Distinctive Ringing Key Ring Override at the extension (station). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2122-[01 to 24]: Key Ring Override (Key xx Ring) Use this option to set up Key Ring Override from system programming.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2123-BLF (DSS Keys) 2123-BLF (DSS Keys) Description Use this program to set up the station (extension) DSS/BLF keys. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2123-[01-24]: DSS/BLF Key Assignments (Key xx Type) Use this option to program an extension’s DSS keys. Feature Keys automatically become DSS keys when the user press INTERCOM.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys for Super Display) 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys for Super Display) Description Use this program to customize the Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2124-[01-12]: Idle Menu Soft Key Assignments (Super Display) (xx Key xx Type) Use this option to customize the Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys.
21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys for Super Display) Super Display Telephone Idle Menu Soft Key Options (Page 2 of 2) 762 ◆ Entry Display 04 COMPANY Press to directly access System Speed Dial Directory Dialing.
21xx-Configuration 213x-Access 2131-Lines 2131-Lines 213x-Access Description Use this program to set up the station (extension) access to outside lines. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool.
21xx-Configuration 213x-Access 2132-Ringing 2132-Ringing Description Use this program to set up the station (extension) ringing for outside lines. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (xx Line xx Ring) Use this option to set the extension’s ringing assignments for lines (lamp only, day and night ringing, night ringing only, and delay ringing day and night).
21xx-Configuration 213x-Access 2133-Line Groups 2133-Line Groups Description Use this option to set the station (extension) access to Line Groups 90-98. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2133-[01-64]: Line Group Access (xx Group xx Access) Use this option to enable or disable the extension’s outgoing access to each Line Group (90-98).
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2141-Type 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2141-Type Description Use this program to assign the station (extension) mailbox type. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2141-01: Station Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the extension’s mailbox type.
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2142-Setup 2142-Setup Description Use this program to set up the Station Mailbox. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2142-01: Number of Messages (# of Messages) Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2142-Setup Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 2142-04: Station Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the Station Mailbox voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Language or the Secondary Language. To activate a different primary or Secondary Language, see 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) (page 879).
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2143-Options 2143-Options Description Use this program to customize various Station Mailbox options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2143-01: Message Playback Order (Playback Order) Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order.
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2143-Options Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 770 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2143-Options 2143-04: Message Waiting Lamp (MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled. Disabling this option will also disable Message Notification.
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) Description Use this program to set up the Automated Attendant options for the Station Mailbox. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2144-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (Auto-Att DND) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb.
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) IntraMail Features • Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 552) Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled Station 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual Station Options: 2101-2501 ◆ 773
21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2144-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Dialing Option options.
21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) Description Use this option to enter an extension’s Personal Speed Dial numbers from system programming. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool.
21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) • Speed Dial (page 315) IntraMail Features • None Options • 90-98 for Line Groups 90-98 Default • No entry 2151-[01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Number (xx Bin xx Number) Use this option to enter the Personal Speed Dial number (normally up to 16 characters). A Personal Speed Dial number can be up to 32 digits long, however.
21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) 2151-[01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Name (xx Bin xx Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the Personal Speed Dial bin. When entering names, use the following Name Programming chart.
21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) Features • Call Forwarding Off Premises (page 51) • Directory Dialing (page 131) IntraMail Features • None Options • Alpha-numeric characters (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above.
22xx-Ring Groups 220x-Setup 2201-Identification 22xx-Ring Groups 2201-Identification 220x-Setup Description For each Ring Group, use this program to specify the Ring Group name and Ring Type. Options 2201-01: Ring Group Name (Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the Ring Group. When entering names, use the following Name Programming chart.
22xx-Ring Groups 220x-Setup 2201-Identification Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) • Group Ring (page 189) IntraMail Features • None Options • Alpha-numeric characters (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above. 2201-02: Ring Group Incoming Ring Type (Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type to calls ringing the Ring Group master number. When an extension in the Ring Group rings, it uses the ring type specified in this option.
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2211-Type 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2211-Type Description Use this program to set the Ring Group Mailbox type. Options 2211-01: Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the Ring Group Mailbox type (Subscriber or Routing).
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2212-Setup 2212-Setup Description Use this program to set up the Ring Group Mailbox. Options 2212-01: Number of Messages (# of Messages) Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.” IntraMail then hangs up.
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2212-Setup Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 2212-04: Ring Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the Ring Group Mailbox voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Language or the Secondary Language. To activate a different primary or Secondary Language, see 4203Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) (page 879).
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2213-Options 2213-Options Description Use this program to customize various Ring Group Mailbox options. Options 2213-01: Message Playback Order (Playback Order)ƒ Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, IntraMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2213-Options 2213-03: Auto Time Stamp (Auto Time Stamp) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message IntraMail will announce the time and date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp will also announce the message sender (if known).
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2213-Options 2213-05: Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep) Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call will hear the voice prompt “Recording” followed by a beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt will not occur.
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) Description Use this program to set up the Automated Attendant options for the Ring Group Mailbox. Options 2214-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (Auto-Att DND) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb.
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2214-03: Dialing Option (Dialing Option) Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see 2214-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any of the options in the Next Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action Table.
22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2214-05: Directory List Number (Directory List) Use this option to specify the Directory List to which the Subscriber Mailbox belongs. When setting up Directory Dialing Mailboxes, you must specify which Directory List you want the Directory Dialing Mailbox to use. The Directory Dialing Mailbox can only call Subscriber Mailboxes that belong to the list it is programmed to use.
23xx-UCD Groups 230x-Setup 2301-Identification 23xx-UCD Groups 2301-Identification 230x-Setup Description For each UCD Group, use this program to specify the UCD Group name and Ring Type. Options 2301-01: UCD Group Name (Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the UCD Group. When entering names, use the following Name Programming chart.
23xx-UCD Groups 230x-Setup 2301-Identification Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) IntraMail Features • None Options • Alpha-numeric characters (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above. 2301-02: UCD Group Incoming Ring Type (Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type to calls ringing the UCD Group master number. When an extension in the UCD Group rings, it uses the ring type specified in this option.
23xx-UCD Groups 230x-Setup 2302-Options 2302-Options Description Use this program to specify the UCD Group overflow destination. Options 2302-01: UCD Group Overflow Destination (Overflow Dest) Use this option to assign the UCD Group overflow destination.
23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2311-Type 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2311-Type Description Use this program to set the UCD Group Mailbox type. Options 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the UCD Group Mailbox type (Subscriber or Routing).
23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2312-Setup 2312-Setup Description Use this program to set up the UCD Group Mailbox. Options 2312-01: Number of Messages (# of Messages) Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.” IntraMail then hangs up.
23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2312-Setup Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 2312-04: UCD Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the UCD Group Mailbox voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Language or the Secondary Language. To activate a different primary or Secondary Language, see 4203Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) (page 879).
23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2313-Playback 2313-Playback Description Use this program to customize various UCD Group Mailbox options. Options 2313-01: Message Playback Order (Playback Order) Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, IntraMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).
23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2313-Playback • Group Mailbox (page 497) Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 2313-04: Message Waiting Lamp (MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. Disabling this option will also disable Message Notification.
23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant Description Use this program to set up the Automated Attendant options for the UCD Group Mailbox. Options 2314-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (Auto-Att DND) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb for the Hunt Group Mailbox.
23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant IntraMail Features • Group Mailbox (page 497) • Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 552) Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 2314-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting.
24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2401-Config (DSS Console Configuration) 24xx-DSS Consoles 2401-Config (DSS Console Configuration) 240x-Setup Description Use this program to designate an owner for each DSS Console. Options 2401-01: DSS Owner (DSS Owner) For each DSS Console, use this option to assign the console owner. The owner is the keyset using the DSS Console. A DSS Console can only have one owner.
24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) Description Use this program to designate the Feature Keys for each DSS Console. 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Codes (Key xx Type) Use this option to enter the key codes for the DSS Console’s Feature Keys. Refer to DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (page 802) for the specifics. Features • Refer to Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120).
24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) The following chart shows the available DSS Console Feature Key assignments. DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 1 of 4) Key Type Undefined Line (page 227) Description Key Code and Data Operation 00 N/A Use this option to designate a Feature Key as undefined (no function). 03 + nn (line number) • Press the key to place or answer call. 04 + n (Park Orbit 60-69) • Press key to Park or retrieve parked call.
24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 2 of 4) Key Type Call Coverage No Ring (page 40) Description Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key. Key Code and Data 07 + nnn (extension number) Operation • Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call. • Press key to call covered extension or pick up ringing call.
24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 3 of 4) Key Type Description Key Code and Data System Speed Dial Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a System Speed Dial key. You assign the key to specific System Speed Dial bin. • There is no BLF for this key type. 14 + nnn (bin 001999) • Press key to dial stored number. Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Personal Speed Dial key.
24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 4 of 4) Key Type Message Center (page 372) Description Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a Message Center key. Key Code and Data 24 + nnn (extension number) Operation • Press key to call Message Center Mailbox. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Off . . . . . . . . .No messages waiting in the Message Center Mailbox. Fast Flash . . . . .Messages waiting in the Message Center Mailbox.
25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 250x-Setup 2501-Text 25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 2501-Text 250x-Setup Description Use this program to customize the Selectable Display Messages. Options 2501-[01-16]: Selectable Display Messages (Message Text) Use this option to program the system’s 16 Selectable Display Messages. Each message can be up to 18 characters long, including any blank spaces you may want to add for readability.
25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 250x-Setup 2501-Text Option Default Message 16 Undefined (up to 18 characters) Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character Key 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 7 Times 1 & - / ‘ 1 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y 0
25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 250x-Setup 2501-Text 808 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type Lines: 3101-3715 31xx-Configuration 3101-Type 310x-Setup Description Use this program to set the line circuit type, name, PBX option, and E1 signaling (for Latin America installations only). If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool.
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type 3101-02: Line Name (Name) Use this option to assign a name (up to 16 characters) to the line. Features • Names for Extensions and Lines (page 249) IntraMail Features • None Options • See the Name Programming Chart on the next page. Default • No names entered.
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (DTMF Dialing) Use this option to set the type of dialing used by the line (DTMF or Dial Pulse).
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type • 7 for Brazil #5 • 8 for Brazil #6 Default • 0 3101-06: MFC Signaling Type (MFC Signaling) For E1 lines only, use this option to specify the MFC Dialing Type.
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3102-Access 3102-Access Description Use this program to set the line Class of Service and Toll Level. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3102-01: Line Class of Service (COS Level) Use this option to assign the line’s Class of Service. Features • See the Features for each option in 14xx-COS (Class of Service) (page 628).
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3103-Settings 3103-Settings Description Use this program to customize basic settings for the line. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3103-01: Transmit Gain (Transmit Gain) Use this option to set the line’s transmit gain. This gain setting allows you to compensate for the transmit gain characteristics of the connected telco or PBX. The setting is applied to each line seizure.
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3103-Settings 3103-03: Loop Length (Loop Length) Use this option to compensate for a line’s loop length. Use the default option for normal installations. Use the short option only when the system is very close to the central office or behind a PBX. Use the long option when the loop length is abnormally long. Set this option for optimal speakerphone performance.
31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3103-Settings 3103-04: Tandem Calls (Tandem Calls) Use this option to enable or disable Tandem Calls for the line. Enable Tandem Calls for lines if Off Premises Call Forwarding should be able to route incoming calls to an off-premises location. The originating line (i.e., the line that Off Premises Call Forwarding will reroute) must have this option enabled. If enabled, the system can forward an incoming over a second line to an offpremise number.
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3111-Features 3111-Features 311x-Options Description Use this program to enable or disable various line features. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3111-01: Disable Forced Account Codes (Disable Forced AC) Use this option to enable or disable Forced Account Codes for an individual line. If enabled, the system will not enforce Forced Account Codes for the line.
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3111-Features • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 3111-04: Enable MFC Group B (MFC Group B) For E1 lines only, use this option to enable or disable the MFC Dialing Group B supervisory signaling. Since not all central offices provide Group B signaling, set this option for compatibility with the connected telco.
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3112-Termination 3112-Termination Description Use this program to set the line termination options. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (Day Termination) Use this option to set the day termination (answering point) for the line. If the line is a Direct Inward Line, it rings the answering point directly during the day.
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3112-Termination 3112-03: Day Overflow Destination (Day Ovfl Destination) Use this option to set the overflow destination for day mode calls (including DILs). The destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, voice mail master number, Ring Group master number, or Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR).
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3112-Termination • Voice Mail (page 372) IntraMail Features • Voice Mail Overflow (page 590) Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 3112-06: Night Overflow Destination (Night Ovfl Destination) Use this option to set the overflow destination for night mode calls (including DILs). The destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, voice mail master number, Ring Group master number, or Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR).
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3113-Ringing 3113-Ringing Description Use this program to set the line Pickup Group assignment and ring types. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3113-01: Pickup Group Assignment (Pickup Group) Use this option to have an incoming call on the line ring all the extensions in the assigned pickup group.
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3113-Ringing 3113-03: Night Ring Type (Night Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type (A, B, or C) for the line’s night ringing. When the line rings an extension in the night ring mode, it uses the ring type specified in this option.
31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3113-Ringing 3113-04: Delay Ring Type (Delay Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type (A, B, or C) for the line’s delay ringing. When the line rings an extension in the delay ring mode, it uses the ring type specified in this option.
31xx-Configuration 312x-Caller ID 3121-Settings 312x-Caller ID 3121-Settings Description Use this program to set the line Caller ID parameters. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3121-01: Caller ID Type (CID Type) Use this option to enable Caller ID for each line. If enabled, Caller ID will occur if also enabled by the other Caller ID programmable options.
31xx-Configuration 312x-Caller ID 3121-Settings Options • 0 for none • 1 for ANI • 2 for *ANI* • 3 for *DNIS* • 4 for *ANI*DNIS* Default • 0 3121-03: ANI/DNIS Delimiter (ANI/DNIS Delimiter) For ANI/DNIS format options 2-4 (see 3121-02: ANI/DNIS Format above), use this option to set the type of data delimiter provided by the telco. The delimiter designates the beginning and end of the ANI/DNIS data string. The delimiter can be any character 0-9, # or *.
31xx-Configuration 312x-Caller ID 3122-Groups 3122-Groups Description Use this program to specify to which Caller ID Groups the line belongs. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3122-[01-08]: Caller ID Group Membership (xx CID Group x) Use this option to indicate into which Caller ID Logging Group the line should log its calls. The line can be a member of any or all groups.
31xx-Configuration 313x-Voice Mail 3131-Settings 313x-Voice Mail 3131-Settings Description For each line, use this program to set the voice mail Caller ID option and IntraMail Answer Table. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3131-01: Pass Caller ID to Voice Mail (Pass CID to VM) Use this option to enable or disable the capability of the line to send Caller ID data to voice mail.
31xx-Configuration 313x-Voice Mail 3131-Settings 3131-03: Line Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the line voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Language or the Secondary Language. To activate a different primary or Secondary Language, see 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) (page 879).
31xx-Configuration 314x-TIE Line 3141-Dialing 314x-TIE Line 3141-Dialing Description For each tie line, use this program to select the line’s dial 9 group and operator extension. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3141-01: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Dial 9 Group (Dial 9 Group) Use this option to specify the Line Group (0-8) selected when an incoming (remote) Tie Line callers dials 9 to place an outgoing call.
31xx-Configuration 314x-TIE Line 3142-Line Access 3142-Line Access Description Use this program to set the tie line outbound line access. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3142-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Access (Line xx Access) Use this option to set up a line access matrix between each Tie Line in the local system and each outgoing line in the local system.
31xx-Configuration 314x-TIE Line 3143-Group Access 3143-Group Access Description Use this program to set the tie line outbound Line Group access. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3143-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Group Access (xx Group xx Access) Use this option to enable or disable the extension’s outgoing access to each Line Group (90-98).
32xx-Groups 320x-Setup 3201-Order 32xx-Groups 3201-Order 320x-Setup Description Use this program to set up Line Groups. Options 3201-[01-64]: Line Group (xx 1st line) Use this option to program lines (1-64) into each of the nine Line Groups (90-98). The order in which you enter lines into a group determines the order in which the system will access the lines when placing an outside call. A line can be in more than one group.
33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3301-Options 33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 3301-Options 330x-Setup Description Use this program to specify the number of DID digits expected from the telco. Options 3301-01: Number of DID Digits (# DID Digits) Use this option to specify the number of incoming DID digits expected from the telco. This entry should match the type of DID service the telco provides.
33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3302-Translations 3302-Translations Description Use this program to set up the system’s DID routing. The DID Translation Table analyzes the DID string received from the telco and routes it to the corresponding extension. You make separate day and night routing entries. The DID Translation Table has 100 entries, using 0-9, with * used as a wild card to represent any digit.
33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3302-Translations Ranges and Exceptions – Incorrect Configuration Table Entry • • Digits Received Day Route Night Route In the day, all calls in the 3xx range route to their respective extensions. The day mode exception routing for 301 and 302 is ignored. Only at night is the exception routing for 301 and 302 in force.
33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3302-Translations • * (wild card representing any digit) Default • 3** for entry 001. All other table entries blank. 3302-01: MFC Category (MFC Category) For E1 lines only, use this option to set the MFC Dialing Category for each DID Table entry. This option is not used in North America.
34xx-PBX 340x-Setup 3401-Codes 34xx-PBX 3401-Codes 340x-Setup Description Use this program to set up the PBX Access Codes Table. Options 3401-01: PBX Access Code Digits (PBX Access Digits) Use this option to enter codes into the PBX Access Codes Table. You can enter up to 10 PBX Access Codes. Each code is either 1 or 2 digits long, using the digits 0-9 and #. You can use * as a wild card character that can be entered in any position.
35xx-Toll Restriction 350x-Setup 3501-Type 35xx-Toll Restriction 3501-Type 350x-Setup Description Use this program to set the Toll Restriction country type and enter additional emergency numbers. Options 3501-01: Toll Restriction Country Type (Toll Restrict Type) Use this option to set the Toll Restriction country type. You should select US Domestic (1) for systems installed in North America.
35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3511-Settings 3511-Settings 351x-Options Description Use this program to enable or disable Active Key Pad (continuous dialing). Options 3511-01: Active Key Pad (Active Dial Pad) Use this option to enable or disable Active Key Pad (continuous dialing) for outside calls.
35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3512-U.S. Dialing 3512-U.S. Dialing Description Use this program to enable or disable the following types of dialing: • 0 + XXX Operator Assisted Dialing • 011 + XXX International Dialing • 101x Equal Access Dialing • Allow N11 Dialing Options 3512-01: Allow 0 + XXX Operator Assisted Dialing (0+XXX) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to manually dial 0 + (operator assisted) calls.
35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3512-U.S. Dialing Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 3512-04: Allow N11 Dialing (Allow N11) Use this option to enable or disable dialing N11 services such as directory assistance (411) and repair (611). This option does not restrict 911 or 1 + 911 calls. These calls are always allowed.
35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3513-International Dialing 3513-International Dialing Description This program is not applicable to systems installed in North America.
35xx-Toll Restriction 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) 3521-Table Options 352x-1010-XXX 3521-Table Options / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) Description Use this program to set up the 1010 + XXX Equal Access Dialing Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the 1010 + XXX Equal Access Dialing Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing). A table entry is 3 digits long, using the digits 0-9.
35xx-Toll Restriction 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) 3522-Table Entries 3522-Table Entries 3522-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the 1010 + Equal Access Dialing Table. You can enter up to 96 codes.
35xx-Toll Restriction 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3531-Table Options 353x-1+XXXOptions 3531-Table / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) Description Use this program to set up the 1 + NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the 1 + NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing). A table entry is 3 digits long, using the digits 0-9.
35xx-Toll Restriction 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3532-Table Entries 3532-Table Entries 3532-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the 1 + NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes.
35xx-Toll Restriction 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3541-Table Options 354x-1+XXX-XXX 3541-Table Options / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) Description Use this program to set up the 1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the 1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing). A table entry is 3 digits long, using the digits 0-9.
35xx-Toll Restriction 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3542-Table Entries 3542-Table Entries 3542-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the 1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes.
35xx-Toll Restriction 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3551-Table Options 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX 3551-Table Options (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) Description Use this program to set up the NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing). A table entry is 3 digits long, using the digits 0-9.
35xx-Toll Restriction 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3552-Table Entries 3552-Table Entries 3552-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes.
35xx-Toll Restriction 356x-XXX-XXX / TBL-B XXXXXX (NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3561-Table Options 356x-XXX-XXX 3561-Table Options / TBL-B XXXXXX (NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) Description Use this program to set up the NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing). A table entry is 3 digits long, using the digits 0-9.
35xx-Toll Restriction 356x-XXX-XXX / TBL-B XXXXXX (NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3562-Table Entries 3562-Table Entries 3562-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes.
36xx-AC Codes (Verified Account Codes Table) 360x-Setup 3601-Codes 36xx-AC Codes (Verified Account Codes Table) 3601-Codes 360x-Setup Description Use this option to enter codes into the Verified Account Codes Table. When 1412-05: Verified Account Codes (page 651) is enabled, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to the entries in this table. If an entry matches, the system allows the call (provided it is not prevented by an extension’s Toll Restriction).
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 370x-Log Groups (Caller ID Logging Groups) 3701-Setup 37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 370x-Log Groups (Caller ID Logging Groups) 3701-Setup Description Use this program to set the record size (capacity) of each Caller ID Logging Group. Options 3701-[01-08]: Caller ID Logging Group Size (CID Group 1 Log Size) Determine the total number of Caller ID records that can be stored in each Caller ID Group. Each group can contain up to 99 records.
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3711-Route 3711-Route 371x-Callback Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID callback route. Options 3711-01: Caller ID Callback Route Type (Route Type) Use this option to specify the type of route used for Caller ID callbacks (line or Line Group).
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3711-Route 3711-01: Caller ID Callback Group (Callback Group) For a type 2 (Line Group) Caller ID callback route, use this option to select the Line Group (90-98) the system will use when placing the callback.
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3712-Treatment Options (Caller ID Callback Dial Treatment Options) 3712-Treatment Options (Caller ID Callback Dial Treatment Options) Description Use this program to set the Caller ID Dial Treatment options.
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3712-Treatment Options (Caller ID Callback Dial Treatment Options) 3712-03: Home Area Code Exception List Type (HNPA Exception Type) Use this option to set the Home Area Code Exception List type (toll or local).
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3713-Home NPA’s (Home Area Code Table) 3713-Home NPA’s (Home Area Code Table) Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID Home Area Code (HNPA) Table. Options 3713-[01-16]: Home Area Code Table Data (xx HNPA #x) Use this option to specify your system’s home area code. This is the area code in which the system is installed. You must make an assignment in this program so that Caller ID can properly process callbacks (return calls).
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3714-HNPA Exceptions (Home Area Code Exception List Table) 3714-HNPA Exceptions (Home Area Code Exception List Table) Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID Home Area Code (HNPA) Exception List Table. Options 3714-[01-96]: Home Area Code Exception List Table Data (xx Dial Code) Use this option to identify which (if any) calls within your home area code are toll calls.
37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3715-FNPA Exceptions (Foreign Area Code Exception List Table) 3715-FNPA Exceptions (Foreign Area Code Exception List Table) Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID Foreign Area Code (FNPA) Exception List Table. Options 3715-[01-96]: Foreign Area Code Exception List Table Data (xx Dial Code) If your dialing area has calls in an adjacent area code that are local calls, enter those codes in this table.
41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type Description Use this program to set the voice mail type and master number. Options 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (VM Type) Use this option to set the type of voice mail connected to your system.
41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (VM UCD Master) Use this option to set the voice mail master extension number (e.g., 700). In most installations, you should not change this option from its default setting (700). Features • Voice Mail (page 372) IntraMail Features • None Options • Extension number using 0-9 (3 digits max.
41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) 411x-Ports (Voice 4111-Options (Voice Mail Mail Port Port Setup) Options) Description Use this program to enter the voice mail port name as well as set the voice mail Class of Service and Toll Restriction Level. Options 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name (Name) Use this option to modify the name for all voice mail ports.
41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) 4111-03: Voice Mail Port Toll Restriction Level (Day) (Day Toll Level) Use this option to set the day mode Toll Restriction Level for all voice mail ports. This allows you to restrict Message Notification callouts placed during the day.
41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character Key 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 1 & - / ‘ 1 2 A B C a b c 2 3 D E F d e f 3 4 G H I g h i 4 5 J K L j k l 5 6 M N O m n o 6 7 P Q R S p q r 8 T U V t u v 8 9 W X Y Z w x y 0 space : 0 # Not used *
41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4112-Off Hook (Voice Mail Port Off Hook Options) 4112-Off Hook (Voice Mail Port Off Hook Options) Description Use this program to set the voice mail dial 9 group and operator extension. Options 4112-01: Outgoing Dial 9 Group (Dial 9 Group) Use this option to specify the dial-9 group for voice mail ports. Whenever a voice mail port dials 9, the system accesses the first available line in the group specified by this option.
41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4113-Line Access (Voice Mail Port Outgoing Line Access) 4113-Line Access (Voice Mail Port Outgoing Line Access) Description Use this program to set the voice mail outgoing line access. Options 4113-xx: Outgoing Line xx Access (Line xx Access) Use this option to set the voice mail port’s access options for lines (no access, incoming only, outgoing only, or full access).
41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4114-Group Access (Outgoing Line Group Access) 4114-Group Access (Outgoing Line Group Access) Description Use this program to set the voice mail Line Group access. Options 4114-xx: Outgoing Line Group xx Access (Group xx Access) Use this option to enable or disable the voice mail port’s outgoing access to each Line Group (90-98).
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4201-Messages (IntraMail Message Options) 42xx-IntraMail 4201-Messages (IntraMail Message Options) 420x-Options Description Use this program to set basic voice mail messaging options. Options 4201-01: Outgoing Message Length (OGM Msg Length) Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded outgoing messages. Outgoing messages include: • Announcement Mailbox Messages. • Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus. • Directory Dialing Messages.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4201-Messages (IntraMail Message Options) 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (ICM Msg Length) Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded incoming messages: Incoming messages include: • Conversation Record. • Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox. • Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON command and then dialing RS to record and send a message. • Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) Description Use this program to set the voice mail Message Notification options. Options 4202-01: Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notification Interval) Use this option to set the minimum time between non-pager Message Notification callouts in which the destination answers, says “Hello,” dials 1 to acknowledge and then enters the wrong security code.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-03: Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Busy Notif. Interval) Use this option to set how long IntraMail will wait, after it dials a busy non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-04: Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts (RNA Notif. Interval) Use this option to set how long IntraMail will wait, after it dials an unanswered non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number. There are three types of unanswered non-pager callouts: ❥ If the callout rings the destination longer than the 4202-05: Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts option.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-06: Number of Callout Attempts (Notification Attempts) Use this option to set how many times IntraMail will retry an incomplete Message Notification callout. This total includes unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an unanswered destination. This option applies to pager and non-pager callouts.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-07: Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged (Pager Retry Until ACK) When this option is enabled, IntraMail will continue to retry a digital pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged. If this option is disabled, IntraMail will retry a digital pager Message Notification the number of time specified in 4202-06: Number of Callout Attempts.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4. Dials the number entered in 4202-08: Digital Pager Callback Number. The system assumes that the notification number will complete dialing approximately 4 seconds after line seizure. This means that, by default, the Digital Pager Callback Number will be dialed into the pager service about 13 seconds after line seizure.
42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) 4203-01: Primary Voice Prompt Language (Primary Lang) Use this option to set the primary IntraMail voice prompt language. There are six possible voice prompt languages, two of which can be active at any one time. One can be active as the Primary Language; the other active as the Secondary Language. If you select a language that doesn’t exist (e.g.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4211-Setup (Answer Table Setup) 421x-Answer 4211-Setup (Answer Table Table Setup) Description For each Answer Table, use this program to set the Default Mailbox, Answer Schedule Override options, and optional Answer Table linking. Options 4211-01: Default Mailbox (Default Mbox) Use this option to set the Answer Table’s Default Mailbox. IntraMail uses the Default Mailbox whenever an Answer Schedule is not in effect.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4211-Setup (Answer Table Setup) Default • No (0) - Disabled 4211-03: Override Mailbox (Override Mbox) Use this option to specify the mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls should route when you also enable 4211-02: Answer Schedule Override above. • If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller will hear the recorded announcement.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Description Use this program to set the Answer Schedule for each Answer Table. Options 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Type (Entry xx Type) Use this option to assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how the Answer Schedule answers calls. The schedule can be one of the following types: 1. Day of the Week A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific day of the week.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Routing Mailbox Number (Entry xx Mbox) Use this option to select the mailbox that will answer calls when this Answer Schedule is active. • If the Routing Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller will hear the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, IntraMail will then hang up, reroute the call, or provide additional dialing options.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Day (Entry xx End Day) Use this option to specify the day of the week a type 2 (Range of Days) schedule should stop. This option does not apply to type 1 (Day of Week) and type 3 (Date) schedules. Features • None IntraMail Features • Answer Tables (page 420) Options - 1 for Sunday. - 2 for Monday. - 3 for Tuesday. - 4 for Wednesday. - 5 for Thursday. - 6 for Friday. - 7 for Saturday.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Start Time (Entry xx Start Time HH:MM) Use this option to specify the time of day the schedule should start. It applies to all schedule types. Features • None IntraMail Features • Answer Tables (page 420) Options • HHMM for time of day (in 24-hour format) • For example, for 8:00AM enter 0800. Default • Answer Schedule 1 for Answer Table 1 is a type 2 (Range of Days) schedule that starts Monday at 8:30 AM.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Time (Entry xx End Time HH:MM) Use this option to specify the time of day the schedule should stop. It applies to all schedule types. Features • None IntraMail Features • Answer Tables (page 420) Options • HHMM for time of day (in 24-hour format) • For example, for 8:00AM enter 0800. Default • Answer Schedule 1 for Answer Table 1 is a type 2 (Range of Days) schedule that starts Monday at 8:30 AM.
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule Example Type 1 (Day of Week) Example Answer Table = 1 Schedule = 1 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 2 Start Day = 1 End Day = 4 Start Time = 0800 End Time = 1030 Schedule = 2 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 8 Start Day = 1 End Day = 4 Start Time = 1030 End Time = 1130 Schedule = 3 Schedule Type = 1 Mailbox Number = 9 Day of Week = 3 Start Time = 0900 End Time = 1000 When setting up Answer Tables with multipl
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Type 2 (Range of Days) Schedule Example Type 2 (Range of Days) Example Answer Table = 1 Schedule = 1 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 2 Start Day = 1 End Day = 4 Start Time = 0830 End Time = 1700 Schedule = 2 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 8 Start Day = 5 End Day = 7 Start Time = 0830 End Time = 1700 Summary ❥ Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Sunday through Wednesday from 08:30 AM to 5:00 PM and answers with Call Routing
42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Type 3 (Date) Schedule Example Type 3 (Date) Example Answer Table = 1 Schedule = 1 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 2 Start Day = 2 End Day = 6 Start Time = 0800 End Time = 1700 Schedule = 2 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 8 Start Day = 7 End Day = 1 Start Time = 0800 End Time = 1700 Schedule = 3 Schedule Type = 3 Mailbox Number = 9 Date = 1225 Start Time = 0800 End Time = 1700 When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4221-Setup (Routing Mailbox Setup) 422x-Routing 4221-Setup (Routing MailboxMailbox Setup) Description Use this program to set the Routing Mailbox type. Options 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to assign a mailbox type to the selected Routing Mailbox. Routing Mailboxes can be Call Routing Mailboxes, Announcement Mailboxes, or Directory Dialing Mailboxes.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4222-Routing Options 4222-Routing Options Description Use this program to set the routing options for each Call Routing Mailbox. The entries you make in this program are valid only if the Routing Mailbox is assigned as a Call Routing Mailbox (1) in 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type. Options 4222-01: Dial Action Table (Dial Action Table) Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing Mailbox.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4222-Routing Options unanswered extension before recalling. The 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) has no interaction with this option. Features • None IntraMail Features • Screened Transfer (page 567) Options • 1-255 seconds • 0 causes immediate recall Default • 15 4222-04: Fax Detection (Fax Detection) Use this option to enable or disable Fax Detection for the Call Routing Mailbox. If enabled, the Call Routing Mailbox will detect incoming fax CNG tone.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4223-Announcement Opts (Announcement Mailbox Options) 4223-Announcement Opts (Announcement Mailbox Options) Description If the Routing Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, use this program to set the Announcement Mailbox options. The entries you make in this program are valid only if the Routing Mailbox is assigned as an Announcement Mailbox (2) in 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4223-Announcement Opts (Announcement Mailbox Options) 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer Automated Attendant calls, use this option to provide additional routing options to the Automated Attendant callers. This option interacts with 4223-01: Repeat Count and 4223-02: Hang Up After below.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) Description If the Routing Mailbox is a Directory Dialing Mailbox, use this option to set the Directory Dialing options. The entries you make in this program are valid only if the Routing Mailbox is assigned as a Directory Dialing Mailbox (3) in 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-03: Screened Transfer Timeout (STRF Timeout) Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer (STRF) from the Directory Dialing Mailbox will ring an unanswered extension before recalling.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-04: Extension Name Match (Name Match) Use this option to determine which portion of the extension’s programmed name Directory Dialing will use to route the call. The options are 1 (first) or 2 (last). The setting you choose in this option depends on how you set up 1511-01: Name Format (page 655).
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-06: Transfer Options (Transfer Option) Use this option to define the action Directory Dialing uses when routing a call (Screened or Unscreened Transfer) Features • None IntraMail Features • Directory Dialing (page 469) Options • 1 for Screened Transfer (STRF) • 2 for Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) Default • 1 898 ◆ Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 DSX Software Manual
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-07: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) Use this option to specify the Next Call Routing Mailbox for the Directory Dialing Mailbox. If a Next Call Routing Mailbox is specified, the following will occur: ■ If the caller dials 0 while listening to the Directory Dialing Message, they route to the 0 action programmed into the Dial Action Table associated with the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-09: Fax Transfer Extension (Fax Transfer Ext) Use this option to specify the extension number of the fax machine associated with the Directory Dialing Mailbox. When the Direct Dialing Mailbox answers a call and detects fax (CNG) tone, it automatically transfers the call to this extension.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment 423x-Dial Actions 4231-Digit Assignment (Dial Action Table Options) Description Use this program to set up the IntraMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment The following table shows the Dial Action Table default assignments.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Options 4231-01: Digit xx Action (Digit x Action) Use this option to assign the actions (functions) to the keys that Automated Attendant callers can dial. See Dial Action Table Actions (page 905) for more on each action.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment • Transfer to a UCD Group (page 585) • Undefined Routing (page 586) • Unscreened Transfer (page 587) Options • Extension number using 0-9, # and * • N for no routing (press Feature Key 1) • I for ignore caller dialed digit (press Feature Key 2) • X for caller dialed digit (press Feature Key 3) • P for pause (press Feature Key 4) Default • See the Dial Action Table Default Settings (page 902).
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Dial Action Table Actions STRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (STRF) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the transfer can go through. ❥ If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call goes through.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment UTRF Action - Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened Transfer to an extension. This is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail transfers the call to the destination and hangs up.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With this action, the caller will hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Routing To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Routing option should be the extension number.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With this action, the caller will not hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller hears the voice prompt “Recording” followed by a beep.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment LOGON Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON) Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log onto voice mail. Depending on programming (see Routing below), the caller is logged directly into a Subscriber Mailbox or is prompted to enter a Subscriber Mailbox of their own choosing. You cannot use the LOGON option with Call Routing and Announcement Mailboxes.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP) When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action, IntraMail says “Goodbye” and immediately hangs up. Routing There is no entry required in the corresponding Routing option. Features • None IntraMail Features • Hang Up (page 506) Options for Action • 6 for Hang Up Options for Routing • Digits using 0-8, # and * (8 max.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO) Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to Routing Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a digit for Sales, and then go to the Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox that provides the dialing options and instructions for Sales.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND) Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an Automated Attendant caller presses an undefined key, they hear, “That is an invalid entry.” The caller can then dial another option. Features • N/A IntraMail Features • None Options for Action • 0 for undefined Options for Routing • Digits using 0-8, # and * (8 max.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Dial Action Table Routing Options Digits (0-9, #, and *) Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attendant call to a specific location (such as an extension). For example, to set up a STRF Action to route to extension 305, for digit 3 enter STRF for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Routing. Features • None IntraMail Features • Dial Action Table (page 465) Options • Digits using 0-8, # and * (8 max.
42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment No Routing (N) Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Routing. When the caller dials #, they hear, “Please enter the mailbox number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.
90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) 9001-System (System Reset) Maintenance Options: 9001 - 9042 90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset 9001-System (System Utilities) Reset) Description Use this program to reset the system. Options 9001-01: System Reset (System) Use this option to reset the system. A reset will restart the system with all the programming intact.
90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) 9002-Station (Station Reset) 9002-Station (Station Reset) Description Use this program to reset a station port. 9002-01: Station Reset (Station) Use this option to reset a station port. A reset will restart the specific extension with all the programming intact. You cannot reset the secondary port of a 2PGDAD Module Door Box port.
90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9011-System (Initialize System) 901x-Initialize(Initialize 9011-System (InitializeSystem) Utilities) Description Use this program to initialize the system. Options 9011-01: System Initialization (System) Use this option to initialize the system database. Warning Initializing the system erases all your programmed entries and replaces them with the factory-installed default values.
90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9012-Toll Restrictions (Initialize Toll Restriction) 9012-Toll Restrictions (Initialize Toll Restriction) Description Use this program to initialize Toll Restriction. Options 9012-01: Initialize Toll Restriction (Toll Restrict) Use this option to initialize Toll Restriction. You should initialize Toll Restriction before using if for the first time. This will also initialize Caller ID Tables 3711 through 3715.
90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9013-CID Logs (Initialize Caller ID Logs) 9013-CID Logs (Initialize Caller ID Logs) Description Use this program to initialize the Caller ID logs system-wide. Options 9013-01: Initialize Caller ID Logs (CID Logs) Use this option to initialize (clear) all the Caller ID logs system-wide. This utility clears all the personal logs as well as all the group logs. It has no effect on other Caller ID programming.
90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9014-Ring Tones (Initialize Ring Tones) 9014-Ring Tones (Initialize Ring Tones) Description Use this program to initialize Distinctive Ringing system-wide. Options 9014-01: Initialize Ring Tones (Ring) Use this option to initialize all ring tones system-wide. This returns all ring tones on all extensions to their default settings.
90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9021-Station Copy 9021-Station Copy 902x-Copy Description Use this program to copy data from an extension to another extension or range of extensions. Options 9021-01: Station Copy (Station Copy) This option allows you to copy station data from one extension to another extension or range of extensions. The table below shows the programs you can copy.
90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9021-Station Copy Using 9021-01: Station Copy To copy data from an extension to another extension or range of extensions: 1. Access option 9021-01. You see: Copy Program 2. Press HOLD and select the option (01-23) corresponding to the station program you want to copy. • You can dial the option number (01-23) or press Volume Up and Volume Down to scroll through the selections. 3. Press HOLD. You see: From Extension 4. Enter the source extension number + HOLD.
90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9022-Line Copy 9022-Line Copy Description Use this program to copy data from a line to another line or range of lines. Options 9022-01: Line Copy (Line Copy) This option allows you to copy data from one line to another line or range of lines. The table below shows the programs you can copy.
90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9022-Line Copy Using 9022-01: Line Copy To copy data from a line to another line or range of lines: 1. Access option 9022-01. You see: Copy Program 2. Press HOLD and select the option (01-12) corresponding to the line program you want to copy. • You can dial the option number (01-23) or press Volume Up and Volume Down to scroll through the selections. 3. Press HOLD. You see: From Line 4. Enter the source line number + HOLD.
90xx-Utilities 903x-Swap Ports 9031-Station Swap 903x-Swap Ports 9031-Station Swap Description Use this program swap two extensions. This swaps all the programming between the two extensions, including the extension number and station name. With 9031-Station Swap, it is no longer necessary to install and wire cross-connect blocks to easily swap two extensions. Options 9031-01: Station Swap (Swap with Ext) This option allows you swap two extensions.
90xx-Utilities 903x-Swap Ports 9032-Line Swap 9032-Line Swap Description Use this program swap two line circuits. For example, if you swap line 1 with line 2, line 1 now uses the telco circuit formerly assigned to line 2 and vise versa. With 9032-Line Swap, it is no longer necessary to install and wire cross-connect blocks to easily swap two lines. Options 9032-01: Line Swap (Swap with Ext) This option allows you swap two line circuits. Features • None IntraMail Features • None Options • See below.
90xx-Utilities 904x-Backup/Restore 9041-Backup 9041-Backup 904x-Backup/Restore Description Use this option to back up (save) the system database to a CompactFlash Card plugged into the IntraMail CompactFlash Card slot. You can then restore (load) the system database using 9042-Restore (page 928). You can store the system database on the IntraMail CompactFlash Card or on a separate FAT16 or FAT32 formatted CompactFlash card. The entire system database uses about 500 Kbytes Of Compact Flash memory.
90xx-Utilities 904x-Backup/Restore 9042-Restore 9042-Restore Description Use this option to restore (load) the database previously backed-up (saved) on a CompactFlash Card using 9041-Backup (page 927). Note that you can store the system database on the IntraMail CompactFlash Card or on a separate FAT16 or FAT32 formatted CompactFlash card. The entire system database uses about 500 Kbytes Of Compact Flash memory. See your system’s Hardware Manual for more and how to install a CompactFlash Card.
DSX Program List DSX Program List DSX Program List System Options: 1001-1702 10xx-Configuration 100x-System 1001-Version 1001-01: System Type 1001-02: Software Version 1001-03: DSP Version 101x-ID 1011-Name 1011-01: System Name 1011-02: Telephone Number Name Programming Chart 102x-Time 1021-Set Time and Date 1021-01: System Time 1021-02: System Date 1022-Daylight Savings Time 1022-01: Automatic Daylight Savings Time Setting 1023-Internet (Network Time Server [NTS]) 1023-01: Network Time Server Name 103x-P
DSX Program List 1101-01: Baud Rate 1102-Modem Settings 1103-USB Settings 1104-Ethernet Setup 1104-01: System IP Address 1104-02: System Subnet Mask 1104-03: Default Gateway 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup 1111-01: Manual DTMF Tone On 1111-02: Manual DTMF Tone Off 1111-03: Speed Dial DTMF Tone On 1111-04: Speed Dial DTMF Tone Off 12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1201-Type (Station Card Type) 1201-01: Card Type 1202-Ports (Primary Station Ports) 1202-01: Primary Station Port Assignment 1203-Secondary Station Ports 1203-
DSX Program List 1401-01: System Speed Dial Access 1401-02: Extended Ring 1401-03: Privacy 1401-04: ACD Supervisor 1401-05: Soft Keys 1401-06: Conversation Record 1401-07: DND Override 1401-08: Receive DID Calls 1401-09: Receive DID Camp-On 1401-10: Name Programming 1401-11: Language Programming 1401-12: Call Screening 1401-13: Hotline Automatic Transfer 1402-Access 1402-01: Forced Line Disconnect 1402-02: Barge In (Intrusion) 1402-03: Camp-On to Busy Extension 1402-04: Silent Monitor 1402-05: Activate Nigh
DSX Program List 1411-01: Camp-On to Busy Lines 1411-02: Line Queue Priority 1411-03: Automatic Hold 1411-04: Enhanced Last Number Redial 1411-05: Unsupervised Conference 1412-Toll Restriction 1412-01: Walking Class of Service (Day) 1412-02: Walking Class of Service (Night) 1412-03: Station Locking 1412-04: Forced Account Codes 1412-05: Verified Account Codes 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only 15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1501-Setup 1501-01: Number of Operators 1502-Assignments 1502-01: Operator Num
DSX Program List 1541-03: SMDR Language 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup 1551-01: Dial # to Enter Account Codes 1551-02: Allow Account Codes in Speed Dial Bins 1551-03: Show Account Codes on Telephone Display 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer 1601-04: UCD No Answer Timer 1602-Outgoing Call Timers 1602-01: Interdigit Timer 1602-02: Line Response T
DSX Program List 1612-07: Shunt Pause Timer 1613-Loop Control 1613-01: Loop Current Detection Timer 1613-02: Far End Disconnect Timer 1613-03: Power Failure Recovery Detect Timer 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 1621-01: Minimum DP Break Timer 1621-02: Maximum DP Break Timer 1621-03: Minimum DP Make Timer 1621-04: Maximum DP Make Timer 1621-05: Minimum Hookflash Timer 1621-06: Maximum Hookflash Timer 1621-07: Minimum Off Hook Timer 1621-08: Dial Pulse Guard Timer 1621-09: Off Hook Guard Ti
DSX Program List 1651-04: Transmit Forced Clear Signal Timer 1651-05: Transmit Seize Signal (BZL) Timer 1651-06: Transmit Double Answer (BZL) Timer 1652-RX (Receive Timers) 1652-01: Receive Minimum Seize Acknowledge Timer 1652-02: Receive Maximum Seize Acknowledge Timer 1652-03: Receive Minimum Digit Acknowledge Timer 1652-04: Receive Maximum Digit Acknowledge Timer 1652-05: Receive Minimum Answer Timer 1652-06: Receive Maximum Answer Timer 1652-07: Receive Minimum Meter Pulse Timer 1652-08: Receive Maximum
DSX Program List Stations: 2101-2501 21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-01: Station Type 2101-02: Station Name 2101-03: Station Display Language 2101-04: Door Chime Selection 2101-05: Outgoing ANI ID 2101-06: Door Relay Assignment 2102-Access 2102-01: Class of Service 2102-02: Station Toll Level (Day) 2102-03: Station Toll Level (Night) 2102-04: User Programming Access Level 2102-05: Station PIN Code 2103-Ringing 2103-01: Day Ring Type 2103-02: Night Ring Type 2103-03: Delay Ring Type 2103-04: Sta
DSX Program List 2113-02: Ring Group 2113-03: Pickup Group 2113-04: Privacy Group 2113-05: Page Group (Zone) 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-01: Prime Line Type 2114-01: Prime Line Key 2114-01: Prime Line Line 2114-01: Prime Line Group 2114-02: Station Ring Down Type 2114-02: Station Ring Down Destination 2114-03: Station’s Operator Extension Number 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options Sample Hunt Group Programming 2115-01: Hunt Type 2115-01: Hunt Destination 2115-01: UCD Group Master Number 2115-02: DID Station In
DSX Program List 2143-Options 2143-01: Message Playback Order 2143-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages 2143-03: Auto Time Stamp 2143-04: Message Waiting Lamp 2143-05: Recording Conversation Beep 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2144-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb 2144-02: Forced Unscreened Transfer 2144-03: Dialing Option 2144-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox 2144-05: Directory List Number 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) 2151-[01-20]: Personal Speed Dial
DSX Program List 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2311-Type 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type 2311-01: UCD Group Routing Mailbox Number 2312-Setup 2312-01: Number of Messages 2312-02: Message Retention 2312-03: System Administrator 2312-04: UCD Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language 2313-Playback 2313-01: Message Playback Order 2313-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages 2313-03: Auto Time Stamp 2313-04: Message Waiting Lamp 2313-05: Recording Conversation Beep 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant 2314-01: Auto
DSX Program List Lines: 3101-3715 31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type 3101-01: Line Type 3101-02: Line Name 3101-03: DTMF Dialing 3101-04: PBX Line 3101-05: E1 Signaling Type 3101-06: MFC Signaling Type 3102-Access 3102-01: Line Class of Service 3102-02: Line Toll Level 3103-Settings 3103-01: Transmit Gain 3103-02: Receive Gain 3103-03: Loop Length 3103-04: Tandem Calls 3103-05: Music On Hold Source 311x-Options 3111-Features 3111-01: Disable Forced Account Codes 3111-02: Override Extension’s Toll Level
DSX Program List 3131-02: IntraMail Answer Table Assignment 3131-03: Line Voice Prompt Language 314x-TIE Line 3141-Dialing 3141-01: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Dial 9 Group 3141-02: Tie Line Caller’s Operator Extension 3142-Line Access 3142-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Access 3143-Group Access 3143-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Group Access 32xx-Groups 320x-Setup 3201-Order 3201-[01-64]: Line Group 33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3301-Options 3301-01: Number of DID Digits
DSX Program List 3531-01: Initialize Table 3531-02: Table Type (Allow or Deny) 3532-Table Entries 3532-xx: Table Data 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3541-Table Options 3541-01: Initialize Table 3541-02: Table Type (Allow or Deny) 3542-Table Entries 3542-xx: Table Data 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3551-Table Options 3551-01: Initialize Table 3551-02: Table Type (Allow or Deny) 3552-Table Entries 3552-xx: Table Data 356x-XXX-XXX / TBL-B XXXXXX (NPA
DSX Program List Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type 4101-01: Voice Mail Type 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name 4111-02: Voice Mail Port Class of Service 4111-03: Voice Mail Port Toll Restriction Level (Day) 4111-04: Voice Mail Port Toll Restriction Level (Night) Name Programming Chart 4112-Off Hook (Voice Mail Port Off Hook Options) 4112-01:
DSX Program List 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Run Date 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Start Time 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Time Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule Example Type 2 (Range of Days) Schedule Example Type 3 (Date) Schedule Example 422x-Routing Mailbox 4221-Setup (Routing Mailbox Setup) 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type 4221-02: Routing Mailbox Voice Prompt Language 4222-Routing Options 4222-01: Dial Action Table 4222-02: Time Limit for Dialing Commands 4222-03: Screened Transfer Timeout 4222-04: Fax Detection 4222-05:
DSX Program List Maintenance Options: 9001 - 9042 90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) 9001-System (System Reset) 9001-01: System Reset 9002-Station (Station Reset) 9002-01: Station Reset 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9011-System (Initialize System) 9011-01: System Initialization 9012-Toll Restrictions (Initialize Toll Restriction) 9012-01: Initialize Toll Restriction 9013-CID Logs (Initialize Caller ID Logs) 9013-01: Initialize Caller ID Logs 9014-Ring Tones (Initialize Ring Tones) 9014-01:
DSX Program List 946 DSX Program List
Index Call Forwarding Off Premises. . .51 Call Forwarding Toggle in a Personal Speed Dial Bin. . .45 Call Routing Flexible. . .487 Call Routing Mailbox. . .450 Call Screening. . .453 Call Timer. . .55 Call Waiting / Camp On. . .58 Callback. . .61 Caller ID. . .63 Caller ID Integration with Voice Mail. . .63 Caller ID on the SMDR Report. . .63 Caller ID to Single Line Telephones. . .64 Display Separator. . .64 Second Call Caller ID. . .63 Single and Multiple Message Format Compatibility. . .
Index Dial Tone Detection. . .98 Dialing by Name. . .469 Direct Inward Dialing. . .99 ANI/DNIS Support. . .100 Direct Inward Line. . .109 Direct Line Access. . .115 Direct Station Selection (DSS). . .117 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. Account Code Key. . .15 Directed Call Pickup. . .129 Directory Dialing. . .131, 469 Directory Dialing Mailbox. . .475 Displaying the Message Count. . .528 Distinctive Ringing. . .135 Do Not Disturb. . .143 Auto Attendant. . .427 Do Not Disturb Override. . .
Index K Key Ring. Menu Instruction. . .507 Mailbox Options. . .520 Main. . .523 Message Announcement. . .417 Listen. . .512 Quick. . .560 Message Center Mailbox. . .373 Message Count Display. . .528 Message Delete. . .530 Message Erase. . .476 Message Forward. . .531 Message Length. . .533 Message Listen Mode. . .534 Message Notification. . .535 Message on Hold. . .541 Message Playback Direction. . .543 Message Reply. . .545 Message Retention. . .547 Message Storage Limit. . .548 Message Waiting. . .
Index Off Hook Signaling. . .255 Overflow To Voice Mail. . .590 Voice Mail. . .373 Priority vs. Prime Line. . .296 Rotary Dialing Callers Automatic Routing. . .442 Routing Undefined. . .586 Routing a Call Flexible. . .487 Routing Mailbox. . .566 P Paging. . .259 Background Music Over External Page. . .260 Door Chime Over External Page. . .260 Intercom Ring Over External Page. . .260 Paging, Meet-Me Conference. . .265 Park. . .266 Password for Mailbox. . .570 PBX / Centrex Compatibility. . .
Index Terminal Hunting. . .155 Tie Lines. . .344 Time and Date. . .349 Time and Date Stamp. . .581 Time and Date with Voice Mail. . .580 Time Stamp Auto. . .431 Toll Restriction. . .351 Transfer. . .358 Centrex. . .460 External. . .483 Forced Unscreened. . .489 Screened. . .567 To a Mailbox. . .583 To a UCD Group with IntraMail. . .585 Unscreened. . .587 Transfer to a Mailbox. . .583 Transfer to a UCD Group. . .585 Transferring to Voice Mail. . .372 Voice Over. . .385 Voice Prompting Messages. . .
Index 952 ◆ Index DSX Software Manual
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway, Shelton, CT 06484 Tel: 800-365-1928 Fax: 203-926-5458 www.necunifiedsolutions.com Other Important Telephone Numbers Sales: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5450 Customer Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5444 Customer Service FAX: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5454 Technical Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway, Shelton, CT 06484 TEL: 203-926-5400 FAX: 203-929-0535 www.necunifiedsolutions.com (1093100) June 9, 2006, Rev 3 Printed in U.S.A.
